CR-30 Service Manual

HEALTHCARE ReadMeFirst
Imaging Services Service Manual for Download
► Purpose of this Document

This document describes how to
• add the “order list for documentation”.
• print.
• add comments.
► Document History
Edition. Release Changes

Revision Date compared to previous Version 1.1
1.2 06-2008 Added how to integrate the order list for documentation in a
printed manual. See section 1.
Edition 1, Revision 2
06-2008 printed in Germany
Document Node ID: 16099429
Agfa Company Confidential Copyright © 2008 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
ReadMeFirst
1 Integrating the Order List for Documentation
IMPORTANT:
The “order list for documentation” is not part of the service manual for download.
Purpose of the “order list for documentation”:
To verify the latest level and completeness of your Service Manual.
(1) In the MEDNET GSO library select the product of your interest.
(2) Select “Order list and Front page → PRODUCT - Chapter 00 - Order List for
Documentation”.
(3) Download the “order list for documentation” to your computer.
(4) When creating a paper manual:
Print the order list and put it behind the cover sheet.
2 Printing single Pages, Chapters or the complete Manual
IMPORTANT:
Preferably print this manual double-sided:
This PDF manual contains empty pages at the end of several chapters, to have the
next chapter starting with an uneven page number when printed doubles-sided.
If printed one-sided, dispose these empty pages.
Preferably print circuit diagrams on a DIN A3 or ANSI B (Ledger) printer, if

available.
Some pages – especially circuit diagrams for equipment – have been created on paper
size larger than DIN A4/Letter. Printing these pages on DIN A4/Letter may result in
reduced legibility. It is recommended to print these pages separately on a DIN A3 or
ANSI B (Ledger) printer.
DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.
Edition 1, Revision 2 Page 2 of 5

06-2008 Agfa Company Confidential
ReadMeFirst
2.1 Printing single Pages or Chapters
To print single chapters or pages of a chapter proceed as follows:

(1) Click the bookmark of the desired chapter.
(2) Write down or remember the shown PDF page number. See Figure 1.
Figure 1: PDF page number in the Adobe reader toolbar
(3) Go the end of the section or desired range of pages.

(4) Select "Print".
(5) Select the page range.
(6) Select "Reduce to printer margins" and "Auto-rotate and Center".
(7) Select “OK”.
Figure 2: Print dialogue for printing single pages or chapters


ReadMeFirst
NOTE:
“Shrink to printable area” may be named on other Adobe Reader versions
“reduce to printer margins” or “shrink oversized pages to paper size”.
2.2 Printing the complete Service Manual
To print the complete service manual proceed as follows:

(1) Select "Print".
(2) Select “All”.
(3) Select "shrink to printable area" and "Auto-rotate and Center"
(see NOTE above).
(4) Select “OK”.
Figure 3: Print dialogue for printing the complete manual
3 Adding Comments
• If you open this file in an Adobe Reader version ≥ 7, the comment toolbar will
show-up.
• This allows adding comments, to highlight or underline text and many more text
manipulations.
Figure 4: Adobe Reader comments toolbar


ReadMeFirst
3.1 Exporting your Comments
NOTE:
Exporting your comments allows importing them again in a next version of the manual.
(1) In the drop down menu “Comment & Markup” select "Show comments List".
Figure 5: Drop down menu “Comment & Markup”
(2) Select the desired comments: Press the CTRL-key for multiple selections.
(3) Select “Options - Export Selected Comments”.
(4) Save the file with any name.
3.2 Importing Comments
(1) In the drop down menu “Comment & Markup” select "Show comments List".
(2) Select “Options - Import Comments”.
(3) Browse for the comments file and press “select”.
NOTE:
The imported comments possibly appear on different pages, if the file where the
comments have been imported has a different number of pages.


HEALTHCARE
Imaging Services Service Manual
Document No: DD+DIS230.10E
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
CR 30-Xm
Type 5179 / 100
1st Edition*
* For the revision status per chapter please refer to the latest version of the “Checklist for Completeness”
in the Agfa HealthCare Library.
CONFIDENTIALITY NOTE:
Use, dissemination, distribution or reproduction of this document by unauthorized personnel is not permitted and may be unlawful.
The controlled version of this document is available from the Agfa HealthCare Library. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.
01-2012 Printed in Germany Document Node ID: 30879695
eq_00_about manual_e_template_v08
DD+DIS230.10E About this Manual
► Manufacturer
Agfa HealthCare N.V.
Published by
Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare GmbH
Tegernseer Landstraße 161
D - 81539 München
Germany
Copyright © 2012 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
All rights reserved.
Technical modifications reserved.
Agfa and the Agfa rhombus are trademarks of Agfa-Gevaert N.V., Belgium,
or its affiliates.
WARNING:
Improper operation or service activities may cause damage or injuries.
INSTRUCTION:
(1) Read the "Generic Safety Directions" document
(see Agfa HealthCare Library > General Info > Agfa HealthCare > Publications >
Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task on
the equipment.
(2) Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and on
the product.
IMPORTANT:
The installation and service of the product(s) described herein is to be performed
by qualified personnel who are employed by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates
or who are otherwise authorized by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates to provide
such services.
NOTE:
To verify the latest version of a chapter of the Service Manual refer to the “Checklist for
Completeness” in the Agfa HealthCare Library.

Edition 1, Revision 1 CR 30-X 2nd, Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225 Chapter 0 / Page 2 of 7
01-2012 CR 30-Xm, Type 5179 / 100 Agfa Company Confidential
This document provides information on the structure and contents of the

CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm Service Manual.

1.1 01-2012 Added information about CR 30-Xm.

► Chapter Overview
Chapter
0 Order List
0 Generic Safety Directions
1 Controls, Connections and Set Up Procedures
2 Functional Description
3 Repair and Service
3.1 Machine specific Safety and Repair Information
3.2 Tools and auxiliary Means

3.3 Troubleshooting
3.4 Electrical and mechanical Codes, Fuses, LEDs
3.5 Replacement of Parts
3.6 Adjustments and Calibrations
3.7 Software Menus and Setting
3.8 Software Releases, Patches
4 Reference and Circuit Diagrams
5 Spare Parts List
6 Accessories
7 Field Modifications
8 Manufacturing Standard Modifications
9 Maintenance
10 Service Bulletins
11 Installation Planning 1 2 3
12 Glossary

► Explanation of Notes
Safety relevant Notes

Icon Signal Word Situation
CAUTION: Possible dangerous situation: Light injuries or damage to the
equipment described in the manual and/or damage to any
other equipment or goods and/or environmental pollution can
be the consequence.
WARNING: Dangerous situation: Potential serious injury to a user,
engineer, patient or any other person and possible
mistreatment of patients can be the consequence.
DANGER: Direct, immediate danger: Death or serious injuries can be the
consequence.
Not-safety relevant Notes

Icon Name Type of Information
INSTRUCTION: Indicates an instruction where it is important to follow literally
the described actions.
IMPORTANT: Highlights very important actions which have to be carried out

to prevent malfunction.
NOTE: • Indicates advice to facilitate the following step or action

without having a direct influence on the step or action.
• Highlights unusual points.
• Indicates background information.
• Can be used to explain or highlight displays of the
graphical user interface.
► Conventions
Highlighting of Tasks
Task number Task Description Remark
(1) Connect the cable. Examples for working steps to be performed in
(2) Switch the machine on. the listed sequence.
Highlighting of Buttons, Functions and Names within a Task

(1) Press <F9> or double-click the Examples are: Menu topics, keyboard keys,
<Refresh> button. icons, device buttons, commands etc.
(2) Enter file name. In this example a file name has to be entered
as term.

1 About this Manual
This Service Manual provides information for the CR 30-X 2nd digitizer with following
type numbers:
• Type 5175, subtype 200 = CR 30-X 2/60 Digitizer
• Type 5175, subtype 220 = CR White 2/60 Digitizer
This Service Manual provides information for the CR 30-Xm digitizer with following type
number:
• Type 5179, subtype 100 = CR 30-Xm Digitizer
The CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm digitizer is part of the CR system, comprising:
• Digitizer Digitizer
• Cassette(s) with image plate(s) Cassette
• NX workstation
517500ab.cdr
NX Workstation
Figure 1
Download The CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm Service Manual is available on Agfa HealthCare Library:
from Agfa Computed Radiography Æ CR Digitizers Æ CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm
Healthcare
Library

Intended This device must only be used to scan exposed X-ray cassettes, containing
Use an erasable image plate (IP).
The digitizer is part of a CR system, consisting of X-ray cassettes with erasable
phosphor image plates and a NX workstation where the X-ray cassettes are identified
and the resulting digital image information is further processed and routed.
This Service Manual does not cover:

• The CR 30-X type 5175 with subtypes 100, 105, 110, 120 and 125
Refer to CR 30-X Service Manual, DD+DIS150.06E, available on
Agfa HealthCare Library:
Computed Radiography Æ CR Digitizers Æ CR 30-X
• The NX Workstation type 4403.
Refer to the Service Manuals available on Agfa HealthCare Library:
Computed Radiography Æ CR Workstation Software

HEALTHCARE
Imaging Services Generic Safety Directions
Generic Safety Directions

for HealthCare Imaging Products
This Generic Safety Directions document comprises the general safety relevant information including
relevant environmental and occupational safety instructions for the Service Engineer.
It is valid for all Agfa HealthCare Imaging Products and part of each Service Documentation as well as
Installation Planning document.
The latest version is available via MedNet, GSO Library path:
General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications => Service Manual

Revision Date compared to previous Revision 1.2:
1.3 07-2009 • Updated table with laser classification to latest changes of the
corresponding standard. See section 3.3.
• Added section Environmental and occupational Safety Instructions.
See section 9.
• Added safety note concerning inroom installations of CR equipment
and corresponding X-ray shielding. See section 17.
• Added laser safety note and safety note concerning electrical checks
after repairs. See section 19.
• Added treatment for Lithium batteries in sections 19 and 21.
• Updated information concerning the recycling pass. See section 24.
► Referenced Documents
Document Title
Not applicable Not applicable

07-2009 printed in Germany Document Node ID: 11849633
eq_generic_safety_directions_e_template_v01
DD+DIS238.06E Generic Safety Directions
► Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 München
Germany
AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa HealthCare N.V.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(see MEDNET GSO => General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications =>
Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task on the
equipment.
the product.

Edition 1, Revision 3 Generic Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 2 of 28
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 DISCLAIMER......................................................................................................... 5
2 USED ICONS ........................................................................................................ 6
3 LABELS ................................................................................................................. 7
3.1 CE Mark................................................................................................... 7
3.2 System Labels ......................................................................................... 7
3.3 System Labels concerning Laser Radiation ............................................ 8
4 PRODUCT COMPLAINTS .................................................................................. 10
5 REFERENCES .................................................................................................... 10
6 INTENDED USE.................................................................................................. 11
7 INTENDED USER ............................................................................................... 11
8 QUALIFICATIONS FOR OPERATION AND SERVICE TASKS.......................... 11
9 ENVIRONMENTAL AND OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS............. 12
10 CONNECTIONS TO OTHER EQUIPMENT ........................................................ 13
11 ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS ................................................................ 14
12 COMPLIANCE..................................................................................................... 14
13 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR OPERATION......................................................... 17
14 RADIATION PROTECTION ................................................................................ 18
15 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR CLEANING AND DISINFECTION......................... 18
16 GENERAL SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR SERVICE ACTIVITIES ....................... 19
17 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION PLANNING ACTIVITIES ............ 20
18 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES................................ 22
19 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ACTIVITIES ........ 23
20 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR REMOTE SERVICE ACTIVITIES ......................... 26

21 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR TRANSPORT AND SHIPMENT OF SPARE

PARTS, ACCESSORIES AND DEVICES............................................................27
22 SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING MODIFICATIONS.................................27
23 SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING HAZARDOUS MATERIALS .................27
24 RECYCLING ........................................................................................................27
25 WASTE DISPOSAL .............................................................................................28
26 ERASING PROTECTED HEALTH INFORMATION (PHI) ...................................28

1 Disclaimer
The installation and service of equipment described herein is to be performed by qualified

personnel who are employed by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates or who are
otherwise authorized by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates to provide such services.
Fitters, engineers and other persons who are not employed by or otherwise directly
affiliated with or authorized by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates are directed to
contact one of the local offices of Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates before attempting
installation or service procedures.
No part of this document may be reproduced, copied, adapted or transmitted in any form
or by any means without the written permission of Agfa HealthCare.
Agfa HealthCare makes no warranties or representation, expressed or implied, with

respect to the accuracy, completeness or usefulness of the information contained in this
document and specifically disclaims warranties of suitability for any particular purpose.
Agfa HealthCare shall under no circumstances be liable for any damage arising from the
use or inability to use any information, apparatus, method or process disclosed in this
document.
Agfa HealthCare is not liable for resulting consequences, damages or injuries if you don’t
operate the product correctly or if you don’t have it serviced correctly.
Agfa HealthCare reserves the right to change the product, the characteristics and its
documentation without further notice to improve reliability, function or design.
NOTE:
In the United States, Federal Law stipulates that medical devices should only be sold to,
distributed and used by or by order of a licensed physician.

2 Used Icons
Icon Name and Circumstances

CAUTION: Possible dangerous situation: Light injuries or
damage to the equipment described in the manual and/or
damage to any other equipment or goods and/or environmental
pollution can be the consequence.
WARNING: Dangerous situation: Potential serious injury to a
user, engineer, patient or any other person and possible
mistreatment of patients can be the consequence.
DANGER: Direct, immediate danger: Death or heavy injuries
can be the consequence.
INSTRUCTION:
If used in combination with the warning or caution sign: Indicates
a specific instruction, which if followed exactly, avoids the
subject of the warning or caution.
If used without warning or caution sign: Indicates an instruction
where it is important to follow literally as described.
IMPORTANT:
Highlights very important actions which have to be carried out to
prevent malfunction.
NOTE:
Indicates advice to facilitate the following step or action.
Highlights unusual points.
Indicates background information.
Can be used to explain or highlight displays of the
graphical user interface.
Is additional information without influence on the action or step!

3 Labels
3.1 CE Mark
CE Mark This product carries the CE Mark. The CE Declaration (CE Conformity)
becomes invalid if the product is changed without explicit consent of the
manufacturer! This applies to all parts, not only to safety elements.
3.2 System Labels
All system labels and software version number locations are referred to within this service
document in the appropriate section.
Enclosed an overview of common labels, according to ISO 3864.
This list is not complete.
Hot Surface Laser Beam Magnetic Field Ionizing Radiation
Obstacles Corrosive Liquid High Voltage Hand Injuries

C&W_005.cdr

3.3 System Labels concerning Laser Radiation
According to its classification, laser radiation can lead to eye and skin injuries.
Each laser source is classified from class 1 to class 4, based on standard
DIN EN 60825-1:2007.
The table below lists the meaning of the different laser classes. Note the detailed
instructions in the user manual and technical documentation.
Class # Meaning Example Label
Class 1: Not dangerous to the human eye, even

when using optical instruments. Can
nevertheless produce irritating effects, CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
especially with low ambient light
conditions.
Class 1 M: Not dangerous to the human eye if no

optical instruments (magnifying glass or LASER RADIATION
binocular) are used. DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH
Can nevertheless produce irritating OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
effects, especially with low ambient light CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT
conditions.
Class 2: Dangerous to the human eye for

intentional staring into the beam.
Not dangerous for short term exposure
< 0,25 seconds.
Using optical instruments does not
increase the risk of eye injury. LASER RADIATION
Can even for short term exposure < 0,25
seconds produce dazzling and irritating DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM
effects, especially with low ambient light CLASS 2 LASER PRODUCT

conditions.

Class # Meaning Example Label
Class 2M: Dangerous to the human eye when

staring into the beam or when using
optical instruments (magnifying glass or
telescope). No hazard for short term
exposure < 0,25 seconds (aversion
response of the eye) without use of LASER RADIATION
optical instruments. Can produce DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM
dazzling and irritating effects even for OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH
OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
short term exposure < 0,25 seconds, CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT
especially at low ambient light conditions.
Class 3R: Possibly dangerous to the human eye for

direct view into the beam.
Risks of an eye injury is increasing with
duration of exposure.
Can produce dazzling and irritating
effects, especially with low ambient light LASER RADIATION
conditions.
AVOID DIRECT EYE EXPOSURE
CLASS 3R LASER PRODUCT
Class 3B: Normally dangerous to the human eye

for direct view into the beam.
Viewing diffuse reflections is normally not
dangerous.
Risk of small skin injuries or ignition of
explosive material if the power of the LASER RADIATION
laser beam is close to the upper limits of
class 3 B. AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM
CLASS 3B LASER PRODUCT
Class 4: Dangerous to the human eye for direct

view into the beam or viewing diffuse
reflections.
Very often class 4 lasers also implicate a
fire hazard.
LASER RADIATION
AVOID EYE OR SKIN EXPOSURE
TO DIRECT OR SCATTERED
RADIATION
CLASS 4 LASER PRODUCT

4 Product Complaints
Any service person who has any complaints or has experienced any dissatisfaction in the
quality, durability, reliability, safety, effectiveness or performance of this product must
notify Agfa HealthCare by the Agfa HealthCare complaint procedure.
If the product malfunctions and may have caused or contributed to a serious injury of a
patient or an accident or if there are any hazards which may cause an accident
Agfa HealthCare must be notified immediately by telephone, fax or written
correspondence to the following address:
Agfa Service Support - local support addresses and phone numbers listed on:
www.agfa.com
Agfa – Gevaert N.V.

Septestraat 27
2640 Mortsel, Belgium.
Fax +32 3 444 4485
5 References
Technical Documentation is available via MedNet (PDF) and your local Agfa HealthCare
support organisation (Paper).
Access to MedNet:
IntraNet: http://docs.agfanet/bu/mi/mednet/mednetcso.nsf
ExtraNet: http://extranet.agfa.com/bu/mi/mednet/mednetcso.nsf

6 Intended Use
This Agfa HealthCare product should only be operated in a hospital or clinical radiological
environment by qualified staff.
It must only be operated according to its specifications and its intended use. Any
operation not corresponding to the specifications or intended use may result in hazards,
which in turn may lead to serious injuries or fatal accidents (for example electric shocks).
AGFA will not assume any liability whatsoever in these cases.
Make sure that the product is constantly monitored in order to avoid inappropriate
handling, especially by children.
The product must only be installed and put into operation under the specified conditions.
7 Intended User
This manual is written for Agfa trained Field Service Engineers and Clinical Application
Specialists, trained users of Agfa HealthCare products and trained diagnostic X–Ray
clinical personnel who have received proper training. Users are considered as the persons
who handle the equipment as well as the persons having authority over the equipment.
8 Qualifications for Operation and Service Tasks
This Technical Documentation describes adjustments and routines which must only to be
performed by qualified technical personnel.
The Agfa (trained) Field Service Engineers and Clinical Application Specialists must have
received adequate Agfa HealthCare training on the safe and effective use of the product
and applicable environmental and occupational safety matters before attempting to work
with it. Training requirements may vary from country to country.
Agfa (trained) Field Service Engineers and Clinical Application Specialists must make
sure that training is received in accordance with local laws or regulations that have the
force of law.
Your local Agfa HealthCare representative can provide further information on training.

9 Environmental and occupational Safety Instructions
Each Agfa (trained) Field Service Engineer and Clinical Application Specialist:
• Must make his or her personal contribution to improve safety and protect the
environment.
• When working on a customers site, has a duty to take reasonable care to avoid injury
to himself or herself or to others who may be affected by their acts or omissions.
• Is obligated to adhere strictly to regulations and instructions.
• Shall familiarise himself or herself with the provisions of the Agfa Healthcare
Health, Safety and Environment Policy and any specific rules or procedures relating to
occupational safety at work and the protection of the environment.
• Shall promptly report any near misses, accidents, incidents or dangerous occurrences
to their line manager and co-operate fully in any investigation.
• Shall co-operate with company management on matters relating to
health, safety and environment and, where appropriate, discuss with and / or assist
their manager in resolving matters relating to health, safety and environment.
• Shall ensure that any company equipment issued to them, or, for which they are
responsible, is correctly used and properly maintained.
• Shall wear protective equipment whenever instructed or if it is recommended to do so.
• Shall be responsible for good housekeeping in the area in which he or she is working.
• Shall report situations, which could put them at risk, on either company or
customers' premises, to their manager or supervisor; and, if warranted, directly and in
confidence, to the Health and Safety Co-ordinator, Global HSE Manager, or ultimately
to the Managing Director.
• Shall report any injuries, diseases or dangerous occurrences to his or her line
manager.
• Shall report any accidents, incidents or near misses to his or her line manager.
• Shall report any situation of which he or she is aware that is potentially dangerous.
• Shall comply with any health surveillance procedure instituted for his or her benefit or
for compliance with regulations.

10 Connections to other Equipment
Agfa HealthCare equipment must only be used in combination with other Agfa HealthCare
equipment or components if these are expressly recognized by Agfa HealthCare as
compatible. A list of such equipment and components is available from Agfa HealthCare
service on request.
Changes or additions to the equipment must only be carried out by persons authorized to
do so by Agfa HealthCare. Such changes must comply with best engineering practice and
all applicable laws and regulations that have the force of law within the jurisdiction of the
hospital.
The Agfa HealthCare products are designed to communicate with other devices in the
hospital network using DICOM protocols.
Connections to other equipment:

Warning:
Accessory equipment not complying with the safety requirements of this product
may lead to a safety hazard.
INSTRUCTION:
Consult the Technical Documentation before making any connections to other equipment.
Consideration relating to the choice of accessory equipment shall include:
• Use of the accessory equipment in the patient vicinity.
• Evidence that the safety certification of the accessory equipment has been performed
in accordance with the appropriate IEC 60601-1 and IEC 60601-1-1 harmonized
national standard.
In addition all configurations must comply with the medical electrical systems standard IEC
60601-1-1. The party that makes the connections acts as system Configurer and is
responsible for complying with the systems standard.
If required, contact your local service organization.

11 Accessories and Spare Parts
Parts and accessories replacement:

WARNING:
Hazards may be introduced because of component failure or improper operation.
INSTRUCTION:
• Replace defective parts with Agfa HealthCare original spare parts.
• Use only tools and measuring instruments which are suitable for the procedure.
• Only approved Agfa HealthCare accessories must be used. For a list of compatible
accessories contact your local Agfa HealthCare organization or www.agfa.com.
12 Compliance
Directive for HealthCare Imaging Products:

Council Directive 93/42/EEC of 14 June 1993 concerning medical devices
(OJ No L 169/1 of 1993-07-12)
• ANNEX I - ESSENTIAL REQUIREMENTS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS The

products are designed and manufactured in such a way that, when used under the
conditions and for the purposes intended and, where applicable, by virtue of the
technical knowledge, experience, education or training of intended users, they will not
compromise the clinical condition or the safety of patients, or the safety and health of
users.
• ANNEX II - EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY: Full quality assurance system

ISO 13485
• ANNEX X - CLINICAL EVALUATION: The clinical evaluation follows a defined and

methodologically sound procedure.

Applied Standards for HealthCare Imaging Products
• IEC 60601-1, Ed. 3: Medical electrical equipment - Part 1: General requirements for
basic safety and essential performance
• ISO 14971:2000, Medical devices – Application of risk management to medical devices
• IEC 60601-1-2, It specifies the MANUFACTURER of the ME EQUIPMENT or ME

SYSTEM provides information to the RESPONSIBLE ORGANIZATION that is essential
in determining the suitability of the ME EQUIPMENT or ME SYSTEM for the
electromagnetic environment of use, and in managing the electromagnetic environment
of use to permit the ME EQUIPMENT or ME SYSTEM to maintain BASIC SAFETY and
provide its ESSENTIAL PERFORMANCE without disturbing other equipment.
Additional standards for documentation:
IEC 62079 Ed. 1: Preparation of instructions - Structuring, content and presentation
Harmonization:
Global Harmonization Task Force (GHTF) www.ghtf.org/
This document has been prepared to comply with Study Group 1 guidance document
of the Global Harmonization Task Force (GHTF) www.ghtf.org/ to assist development
of a consistent, harmonized definition for a medical device that could be used within a
global regulatory model and would offer significant benefits to the manufacturer, user,
patient or consumer, and to Regulatory Authorities and support global convergence of
regulatory systems.
IECEE CB SCHEME
The IECEE CB (Certification Body) Scheme is the world's first truly international system
for acceptance of test reports dealing with the safety of electrical and electronic products.
It is a multilateral agreement among participating countries and certification organizations.
Agfa has produced a CB test report and claims national certification in all other member
countries of the CB Scheme.
Details see www.iecee.org

Radiation of radio frequency:

CAUTION: For USA only:
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the service manual, may cause interference
to radio communication.
Note:
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
computing device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to
provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial
environment.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference.
The user will be required to take all necessary measures to correct the interference at
his own expense.

13 Safety Directions for Operation
Accessibility of the mains power switch:

CAUTION:
Do not obstruct the mains power switch.
Position the Agfa HealthCare product so that it is possible to disconnect the mains power
connection.
• Under certain conditions the Agfa HealthCare product will show a display containing a
message. This message will show that either a problem or action has occurred or that
a requested action is required or cannot be performed. The user must read these
messages carefully they will provide information on what to do. This will be either
performing an action to resolve the problem or to contact the Agfa HealthCare
service organization. Details on the contents of messages can be found in this
Technical Documentation.
• All images created using any image technology can show artifacts which could be
confused with diagnostic information. If there is any doubt that the diagnostic
information could be corrupted, additional investigations must be performed to get
clear diagnostic information.
• Ventilation openings must not be covered.
• If you notice conspicuous noise or smoke, disconnect the product immediately from
the mains.
• Do not pour water or any other liquid over the device.
• If a system malfunction causes an emergency situation involving the patient, operating
personnel or any system component, activate the emergency stop for the system
concerned. All motor driven system movements will be stopped.
• Do not store any magnetic media near or on devices, which produce magnetic fields,
since stored data may be lost.
Explosive environment:
DANGER:
Risk of explosion.
Never operate this device in zones where there are flammable anesthetics or oxygen which
may cause an explosion.

Usage of an un-interruptible power supply:

Warning:
Images can be lost due to power failure.
Connect the equipment to an un-interruptible power supply (UPS) or an institutional
standby generator.
14 Radiation Protection
Only qualified and authorized personnel shall operate any X-Ray system. In this context
qualified means those legally permitted to operate this X-Ray equipment in the jurisdiction
in which the X-Ray equipment is being used, and authorized means those authorized by
the authority controlling the use of the X-Ray equipment. Full use must be made of all
radiation protection features, devices, systems, procedures and accessories.
Ionizing radiation can lead to radiation injuries if handled incorrectly. When radiation is
applied, the required protective measures must be complied with.
15 Safety Directions for Cleaning and Disinfection
• Details about cleaning and disinfection or sterilization methods that may be used on
SYSTEM parts or ACCESSORIES that can become contaminated through contact
with the PATIENT or with body fluids, are referred to within the individual service
documents.
• Disconnect the power supply from the equipment prior to cleaning the equipment.

16 General Safety Directions for Service Activities
• This system uses high voltage. Please consider the respective safety regulations.
• Electrical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified electrician.
• Mechanical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified technician.
• The safety directions for operation (see section 13) are also valid for all service
activities.
• During all service activities observe prescribed local and country-specific
requirements (e.g. occupational safety and accident prevention regulations).
• All existing screw connections must be tightened sufficiently firmly, but they may not
be overstressed when tightening. There must always be compliance with stated
torque values!
• Damaged or missing screws may be replaced only with the same screw types that
have the specified hardness rating. Unless a different value is listed in the
instructions, all Allen screws used must be hardness rated 8.8.
• All screws must be secured in accordance with the corresponding data.
If "Loctite" has to be used to secure screws, this is stated in the text.
• Any Agfa service PC or tool which is to be connected via RS232, RJ45, USB or other
interface to an Agfa device must not be connected to the mains but must be operated
on its internal battery or indirect supply (low voltage).
• When handling printed circuit boards (abbr.: PCBs) the following points must be
observed:
o Always switch off the equipment and unplug the power cord, before you
disconnect or connect cables on printed circuit boards.
o When working on PCBs, always wear an anti-static wrist strap. Never touch any
parts or components on PCBs with your bare fingers.
o PCBs have to be kept or transported in their protection bags. Never carry a
PCB without protection bag and walk on carpet or plastic floor covering
(electrostatic charge).
o Once the PCB is taken out of its protection bag, it has to be protected from
electrostatic charge by a grounded mat.
Static discharge at electrical components:

CAUTION:
Static discharge! Electrical components may be destroyed:
For the repair on electrical components, wear a grounding strap
(Order number: CM+9 9999 0830 0) around the wrist and connect the other end of this
strap on a grounded conducting metal piece.

17 Safety Directions for Installation Planning Activities
Protecting CR (Computed Radiography) Equipment against scattered X-Rays:

Warning:
Image plate is sensitive for X-rays. Poor image quality possible.
The digitizer and the cassette storage shall be protected against X-ray radiation this way,
that the annual dose equivalent at the installation place will not exceed 1 mSv.
Protecting Film-Screen Systems against scattered X-Rays:

Warning:
Film is sensitive for X-rays. Poor image quality possible.
The film-screen system shall be protected against X-ray radiation this way, that the annual
dose equivalent at the installation place will not exceed 1 mSv.
Accessibility of the power disconnection device:

Warning:
Electrical device. Shock possible.
INSTRUCTION:
• Do not position Agfa EQUIPMENT so it is difficult to operate the disconnection device

when an APPLIANCE COUPLER or separable plug is used as isolation.
• Local and International wiring regulations must be observed. Check all supplies and
voltages, currents, trips and fuses with the Hospital facilities department or their
engineers.

• The device complies with the EN 60601-1, 2006 standard for Information Technology.
This means that, although it is absolutely safe, patients may not come in direct contact
with the equipment. Therefore the operator console must be placed outside a radius
of 1.5 m around the patient.
R = 1.5m
1.5m
1.5m
Patient environment
• This device should be installed behind the institution firewall for network security and
anti-virus protection. No ongoing computer virus protection or network security for this
medical device is provided (e.g. a computer firewall). Network security and anti-virus
provisions are the ongoing responsibility of the user or institution.
Fixing equipment at the wall or floor:

Warning:
Unknown composition of wall or floor structure: Risk of injury or damage:
Hospital management is responsible for the position, location and fixing of all equipment.
Floor load:
CAUTION:
Heavy device may damage the floor covering.
Make sure that the floor covering is solid enough to stand the weight of the device.
Fixing equipment at the ceiling:

CAUTION:
Ceiling construction may be inadequate for fixing of equipment: Risk of injury or
damage:
Hospital management is responsible for the position, location and fixing of all equipment.

18 Safety Directions for Installation Activities
• If not otherwise stated, installation and configuration is performed by Agfa HealthCare

trained personnel.
• If damage of the package is visible from the outside contact your local AGFA
representative.
• Apart from wearing the required protective clothing, e.g. safety boots and gloves, care
must be taken that heavy loads are correctly lifted/carried to avoid injury. The relevant
instructions must be complied with. Heavy or awkward loads must be moved by
mechanical means or by several people.
• When installing the product be sure that there is either a mains plug or an all-cable
disconnecting device in the internal installation fitted near the product and that it is
easily accessible.
• Defective covers, sharp edges or protruding parts of equipment can cause injuries, if
accidentally knocked into. Route cables and position equipment safely.
• This device should be installed behind the institution firewall for network security and
anti-virus protection. No ongoing computer virus protection or network security for this
medical device is provided (e.g., a computer firewall). Network security and anti-virus
provisions are the ongoing responsibility of the user or institution.
Connection of the device to the power supply:

CAUTION:
Risk of damaging the device by using the wrong power supply:
INSTRUCTION:
Prior to connecting the device to the mains:
• Compare the power requirements indicated on the type label with the available
power supply in the installation room.
• Check the service manual for the type of input voltage selection, manual or
automatic: If manual, select the appropriate voltage and fuses.
• Confirm to use the correct socket and plug for the required power supply.
• Check the equipment will work with the power supply available.

Ground potential differences:

CAUTION:
To comply with ISO 60601-1 (annex I) all computers and peripherals must be
connected to the same power source.
INSTRUCTION:
• Always connect the associated monitor to the same Uninterruptible Power Source as
the PC.
• When different combinations of equipment are used in various medical environments
a potential difference (V) can exist between the protective earths in different localities.
If the protective earthing fails this potential difference can cause a HAZARD for the
OPERATOR or for the PATIENT.
19 Safety Directions for Maintenance and Repair Activities
• This Technical Documentation identifies the parts on which preventive inspection and
maintenance shall be performed by Agfa HealthCare service personnel, including the
periods to be applied.
• In general the device has to be switched off during service activities. Exception: If the
device is switched on to perform tests pay particular attention to any hazards due to
moving and rotating parts. Avoid lose clothing or finger traps. Switch off the device
immediately after the tests.
• Do not turn motors manually. If required, first disconnect the motor from the motor
control board.
• Make sure that the power cord does not show any signs of damage.
• After repair work always check that the integrated safety features are not overridden
or disconnected.
• If there is any visible damage to the machine casing do not hand-over the product to
the customer. First repair the machine casing.

Replacing batteries:
WARNING:
Battery can explode, causing chemical burns.
INSTRUCTION:
• Check that batteries are inserted with correct polarity.

• Only use batteries of the same type or an equivalent type as specified by the
manufacturer.
• Dispose of empty batteries in compliance with the specifications of the manufacturer.
• When removing lithium batteries from the equipment take appropriate measures to
avoid short circuit of the battery:
Either use tape to cover the two poles of the battery or put the battery back in its
original packing and secure the packing by tape.
Performing the electrical test according to national regulations:

WARNING:
Improper ground connections inside the device or too high leakage current may lead to
electric shocks.
• After any work at the power supply or at any component connected to mains voltage
inform the responsible organization 1 about the necessity of the electrical test
according to national regulations.
If specific national regulations do not exist: It is recommended to perform the
electrical test according to IEC 62353.
• Make sure, that all grounding connections to metallic covers and all grounding
connections inside the device are present.
NOTE:
On MedNet, GSO Library path "General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications =>
Service Manual" a form “IEC 62353:2007 Test Documentation” for CR Digitizers is
available, to be handed out to the responsible organization (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
1
Responsible Organization:
Entity accountable for the use and maintenance of a medical equipment or a medical equipment system. The
accountable entity can be, for example, a hospital or an individual clinician.
Performing service activities at devices emitting laser radiation:

WARNING:
Laser radiation. Eye injury possible.
INSTRUCTION:
• Strictly observe the warning notes in the service manual of devices emitting laser
radiation (See service manual chapter describing Safety Guidelines / General
Repair Instructions) and at the corresponding steps of instructions.
• Strictly observe the warning labels at the modules emitting laser light. For the
meaning of the labels refer to section 3.3 in this document.
• Do not look into the laser beam.
• Do not open modules containing a laser. Only open modules containing a laser if
explicitly instructed to do so.
• Do not keep tools in the laser beam unless explicitly instructed to do so.
• Make yourself familiar with the path of the laser light and the conditions, when the
laser beam is switched on. Refer to the Functional Description in the
corresponding service manual.
• Do not operate modules with laser outside the device.
Sharp edges:
CAUTION:
Sharp edges inside the device: Cut or abrasion possible.
Be careful at maintenance and replacement of parts.
Cleaning optical elements:

CAUTION:
Image artifacts possible after cleaning optical elements.
When cleaning optical elements follow the service manual precisely.

Secured screws:
CAUTION:
Opening screws secured by red lacquer may misalign important device
adjustments:
Do not open screws that are secured by red lacquer.
Opening PCs and Workstations:

Warning:
Electrical shock and damage to the equipment possible.
• Only open the PC or workstation if explicitly stated in the service manual.
• Unplug before opening.
• Observe anti-static safety regulations.
Replacing fuses:
Warning:
Replacing fuses by wrong type may lead to fire hazard!
Use only fuses of the exact value and characteristics stated in the service manual or on
the device.
20 Safety Directions for remote Service Activities
Remote Service Activities:

Warning:
During remote service activities images can be lost.
Inform the customer prior to remote service activities to finish the current work and to
stop working on the system.

21 Safety Directions for Transport and Shipment of Spare Parts,

Accessories and Devices
• In compliance with transport regulations, all uninterruptible power supplies (UPS)

must be shipped with batteries disconnected.
• Use the original packing when returning spare parts, accessories or devices.
• Before returning any spare part with a built in lithium battery remove it and dispose the
batteries locally according to local waste regulations.
22 Safety Directions concerning Modifications
Modifications made in products/systems shipped by Agfa HealthCare must not be

implemented without written permission from Agfa HealthCare.
This applies in particular to changes which may affect the mechanical and/or electrical
safety or radiation-protection properties of a product (e.g. changing of safety distances,
removal of locks/instructions etc.).
23 Safety Directions concerning Hazardous Materials
'Hazardous materials' is the designation for substances which can ignite or explode or
which are toxic, injurious to health, corrosive or irritating. The “Hazardous Material”
instructions must be read and the required protective measures must be complied with
when performing work to avoid health risks.
Their properties together with the hazards and protective measures connected with them
are identified clearly by symbols and described by the instructions appertaining to the
hazardous substances.
24 Recycling
Agfa HealthCare has Recycling Passports available for all equipment. The Recycling
Passport explains whether hazardous materials, special components and batteries are
present, where they are located and how they can be removed at the end of the life cycle.
The Recycling Passports are meant to be used as information for waste treatment
partners and companies that want to recycle end-of-life Agfa equipment.
To get a copy of the required Agfa HealthCare Recycling Passport please contact your
local Sales organization.

25 Waste Disposal
On August 13, 2005, the European Directive on Waste Electrical and

Electronic Equipment (WEEE) 2002/96/EC, amended by Directive
2003/108/EC, came into force.
The directive on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) aims to

prevent the generation of electric and electronic waste and to promote the
reuse, recycling and other forms of recovery. It therefore requires the collection
of WEEE, recovery and reuse or recycling.
This directive has to be implemented into national law by the individual
European countries by August 13th 2005.
Due to the implementation into national law, specific requirements can be

different within the European Member States.
This symbol on the product, or in the manual and in the warranty, and / or on
its packaging indicates that this product shall not be treated as household
waste.
For more detailed information about take-back and recycling of this product,
please contact your local Agfa service organization. By ensuring this product is
disposed of correctly, you will help prevent potential negative consequences
for the environment and human health, which could otherwise be caused by
inappropriate waste handling of this product. The recycling of materials will
help to conserve natural resources.
If your equipment or replaced spare parts contain batteries or accumulators
please dispose of these separately according to local regulations.
26 Erasing Protected Health Information (PHI)
AGFA HealthCare Field Service Personnel or its authorized affiliates are responsible for
the removal of Protected Health Information (PHI) patient data from devices, modules or
parts that are removed from the customer’s site. This also applies to the exchange of
spare parts, especially to parts that are returned to central warehouses for repair or
refurbishing. Examples for parts or modules that may contain Protected Health
Information (PHI) are: Computer hard disks, CD-ROMS, backup tapes, archive tapes.

Chapter 1
HEALTHCARE Controls, Connections,
Imaging Services
and Setup Procedures
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
CR 30-Xm
Type 5179 / 100
This document describes:

 All important routines to be carried out prior to putting the machine in operation
 Location and function of the controls and connectors of the machine
 All routines necessary to put an unpacked machine in operation

Revision Date compared to previous version 1.3
1.4 02-2012 Added Mammography specific items for CR 30-Xm.
Document Title
DD+DIS229.10E CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm Service Manual,
Chapter 11 - Installation Planning
DD+DIS230.10E CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm Service Manual,
Chapter 3.2 - Tools and auxiliary means
DD+DIS055.11E NX workstation Service Manual,
Chapter 4 - Installation and Configuration
DD+DIS283.11E Service Manual: CR Mammography Solution based on
CR30-Xm

eq_01_setup_procedure_e_template_v08
DD+DIS230.10E Controls, Connections, and Setup Procedures
► Manufacturer
Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany
Copyright  2012 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
or its affiliates.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
IMPORTANT:
such services.
NOTE:

LIST OF CONTENTS
1 INSTALLATION PREPARATION .............................................................................................4

1.1 Checking Installation Site Prerequisites ...................................................................................4
1.2 Preparing the required Tools ....................................................................................................5
1.3 Unpacking the Digitizer .............................................................................................................6
1.4 Checking the Shipment Completeness.....................................................................................8
2 CONNECTING THE DIGITIZER TO THE NX WORKSTATION...............................................9

2.1 Connecting the Cables..............................................................................................................9
2.2 Switching on the Digitizer and NX Workstation ......................................................................11
2.3 Taking out the Digitizer USB Flash Drive ...............................................................................12
2.4 Installation of the Error Viewer on the NX Workstation ..........................................................14
2.5 Configuring the NX Workstation with Default Settings ...........................................................14
2.6 Testing Standalone Installation...............................................................................................19
2.7 Filling in Site specific Data ......................................................................................................20
2.8 Checking Software Version.....................................................................................................20
2.9 Configuring the Maintenance Indicator (Optional) ..................................................................21
3 CONFIGURING THE DIGITIZER AND THE NX WORKSTATION FOR THE HOSPITAL

NETWORK .............................................................................................................................22
3.1 Adapting the Local Settings and Network Settings at the Digitizer.........................................22
3.2 Adapting the Communication Parameters at the Workstation................................................22
3.3 Creating CPF File and Loading it to the Digitizer....................................................................23
4 COMPLETION OF INSTALLATION .......................................................................................25

4.1 Checking the Technical Image Quality of the System ............................................................25
4.2 Confirming the Installation Date of the Digitizer......................................................................32
4.3 Performing a Backup ..............................................................................................................33
4.4 Storing the USB Flash Drive ...................................................................................................34
4.5 Hand-over of the System to the Clinical Application Specialist ..............................................34
5 INSTALLATION CHECKLIST .................................................................................................38

1 Installation Preparation
This document describes the installation and configuration of the digitizer.
NOTE:
For the installation and configuration of the NX Workstation. refer to Chapter 4 of the
corresponding NX Workstation version in the Agfa HealthCare Library:
Computed Radiography  CR Workstation Software
CR 30-X 2nd is only supported as of NX 2.0.8500 / 3.0.8500.
CR 30-Xm is only supported as of NX 2.0.8600 / 3.0.8600.
For installation instructions of optional digitizer components like “All-in-one Cart”,

UPS or Mobile Kit refer to the accompanying document of the option.
The Installation Checklist in section 5 of this chapter gives an overview of all steps
of the digitizer installation and guides through the complete installation process.
The task overview for preparing installation is listed in following table:
# Task Overview Section

1 Checking installation site prerequisites 1.1
2 Preparing required tools. 1.2
3 Unpacking the digitizer 1.3
4 Checking the shipment completeness 1.4
1.1 Checking Installation Site Prerequisites
REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 15 minutes
(1) Confirm that all prerequisites described in the "Installation readiness checklist"
are fulfilled.
Refer to the checklist in CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm Service Manual chapter 11,
Installation Planning.

(2) Download the following documents from the Agfa HealthCare Library before
starting with the installation:
 Solution Structure Data Document, Document ID* 30781759
(Intranet Link / Extranet Link)
 CR/DR Interoperability Matrix, Document ID* 31333326,
(3) Check before installation, if all system components with their hardware and
software versions are compatible to each other.
1.2 Preparing the required Tools
Part of digitizer delivery
Torx Key TX20

USB Flash Drive
1,5 mm Copper Filter Spare part number*:
Spare part number*: CM+6037431 (CR 30-X 2nd)
CM+9 5155 1015 2 CM+6045180 (CR 30-Xm) Torx Key TX45
2 mm Al Filter (CR 30-Xm only) Limit Pattern CD ROM Limit Pattern CD ROM
Spare part number*: (CR 30-X 2nd only) (CR 30-Xm only)
CM+9 5148 1090 0 Spare part number*: Spare part number*:
CM+9 5175 9160 0 CM+6049480
Not part of digitizer delivery
Polynit wipes CR Phosphor Plate Cleaner

Spare Part Number*: Spare part number*:
Lint free cloth cutter 10+9 9999 1273 0 10+9 9999 1197 0
* The last digit in the spare part number indicates the spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.
NOTE:
For connection of CR 30-Xm to NX with software version 2.0.8600 / 3.0.8600 the
CR 30-Xm digitizer model file is required. Download the CR 30-Xm model file from the
Agfa HealthCare Library:
Computed Radiography > CR Digitizers > CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm

1.3 Unpacking the Digitizer
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) Compare the labels on the boxes with the customers order list and the
shipping papers.
(2) Check the packing material for visible transport damage such as:
 Dented edges
 Damage on the box
 Torn fixing elements (metal straps)
(3) Check the attached safety indicators on the packing boxes.
IMPORTANT: White field is OK.

If the device was tilted, the circle in the Red field is not OK.
arrow head of the TILTWATCH changes
from white to red. STOSSEMPFINDLICH
If the device was subjected to shocks, the

square field in the middle of the
SHOCKWATCH changes from white to
red.
Figure 1
 If damages are visible from the outside, inform the carrier. The damage must be
noted down in the handover documents.
 If the device should be replaced, contact your local AGFA representative.
 If no damage is visible from the outside start installation.
(4) Unpack the digitizer. The unpacking

instructions are printed on the
digitizer box.
Figure 2 shows an example of the
unpacking instructions.
Figure 2

WARNING:
The digitizer is heavy (72.5 kg; 159.8 lb). Risk of injuries when lifting the digitizer.
 At least two persons have to lift the digitizer from one position to the other.
 When removing scanner only one person is needed to lift the digitizer from one
position to the other.
 Use proper foot and hand protection when lifting the digitizer.
 Lift the digitizer from the sides only. Do not lift at the feed table.
WARNING:
Excessive vibrations during scanning may decrease image quality.
The structure and stability of the used table need to be suitable in relation with the
size and weight of the system. The table may not be subject to excessive shock and
vibrations from other sources.
(5) Lift the digitizer from the pallet on the provided table.

1.4 Checking the Shipment Completeness
(6) Compare the scope of delivery with the packing list.
Example for packing list:
Quantity Description
1 Digitizer
1 Packing list
1 Installation report
1 CE declaration of conformity
1 Installation Procedure
(Chapters 1 and 11 of the Technical Documentation)
1 Power cable, Europe 3.00 m
1 Power cable, US 3.00 m
1 Network cable 5 m / 16 feet long
1 1.5 mm CU filter
1 2 mm Al filter (CR 30-Xm only)
1 USB flash drive with Software for the digitizer
(delivered in the digitizer USB flash drive holder)
1 Torx Key TX20
1 Torx Key TX45
1 CD with limit pattern for flatfield evaluation
1 CD with User Manuals in all specified languages**
* RoHS = Restriction of the use of certain Hazardous Substances

** Language: Chinese-simplified, Chinese-traditional, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English, Finnish,
French, German, Greek, Italian, Korean, Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese, Russian, Spanish,
Swedish, Thai, Vietnamese, Estonian, Hungarian, Latvian, Lithuanian, Slovak, Slovenian, Turkish

2 Connecting the Digitizer to the NX Workstation
REQUIRED TIME:
This section is split up into the following steps:
# Task Overview Section

1 Connecting the cables. 2.1
2 Switching on the digitizer and NX Workstation. 2.2
3 Taking out the USB flash drive. 2.3
4 Installing the Error Viewer on the NX Workstation. 2.4
5 Configuring the NX Workstation with Default Settings. 2.5
6 Testing standalone installation. 2.6
7 Filling in site specific data. 2.7
8 Checking of the software version. 2.8
9 Configuring the maintenance indicator. 2.9
2.1 Connecting the Cables
IMPORTANT:
Do not yet connect the digitizer and NX Workstation to the hospital network.
Connecting the digitizer and the NX Workstation into the hospital network is performed
after checking the stand-alone installation of the system.
NOTE:
The digitizer is delivered with two power cables for US/Europe. If a different cable
is needed, organize it locally.
For more information refer to CR 30-X 2nd Service Manual, chapter 11, Installation
Planning.

(1) Connect the mains cable.
(2) Make a direct network connection Power Supply Input

between digitizer and NX.
Network
Connector
517501ad.cdr
Figure 3
(3) Fasten the mains cable and

network cable at the corresponding
cable holder.
5175_C01_001.ai
Figure 4
Observe the following safety note if the NX Workstation is delivered as a laptop.
CAUTION:
The accumulated heat developed by the digitizer and the laptop may affect the
operation of the system.
Do not place the laptop on top of the digitizer.
NOTE:
Due to the workflow of the system it is recommended to install digitizer and
NX workstation close together.

2.2 Switching on the Digitizer and NX Workstation
(1) Switch on the digitizer.

(2) Switch on the NX Workstation.
(3) Login with user "crservice".
ON
5175_C01_002.ai
Figure 5
IMPORTANT:
The digitizer always has to be switched on before the NX workstation, if both of
following conditions are fulfilled:
 NX software is NX 2.0.8500 / 3.0.8500 or NX 2.0.8600 / 3.0.8600
 Digitizer and NX workstation are connected directly via network cable
Workarounds to avoid a switch-on sequence:
Possibility 1: Use a network switch to connect digitizer and NX workstation.
Possibility 2: Connect digitizer and NX to the local network. See also section 3.
NOTE: blue
After switch on a selftest is executed. green or Status indicator
red
For explanation of the status indicator Erase button
colors see table next page.
5175_C01_003.ai
Figure 6

Status Indicator Digitizer Status Meaning

Blue Constant Activating the erasure cycle. ON if erasure cycle active.
Constant Stand-by mode (READY) ON if:
 Ready / Stand-by
Green  Cassette is ready for removal.

Flashing Busy with scanning and ON during scan cycle active.
transporting cassette and
image plate.
Red Constant Service Mode or Service ON in case of Service Mode or
Required Service Required.
Flashing  Warm up / Self-test Check NX workstation for
further information and detailed
 Processing instructions.
 Software down Error resolvable by User.
 Error
2.3 Taking out the Digitizer USB Flash Drive
(1) Press both buttons at the feed A

table (A).
(2) Pull out the cassette unit (B).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 7
CAUTION:
Parts underneath the top cover can be damaged.
Carefully remove the top cover. Follow the instructions as shown in next step.

(3) Remove two screws (A).

(4) Take off the top cover (B, C).
5175_c35_004.cdr
Figure 8
(5) Remove screw (A).
(6) Take out the USB flash B
drive (B).
5175_c35_backup1.cd
Figure 9
(7) Mount the Top Cover (A, B).
Do not mount the screws yet. A
5175_c35_404.cdr
Figure 10

2.4 Installation of the Error Viewer on the NX Workstation
(1) Insert the USB flash drive at the NX workstation.

(2) Copy the file \ErrorViewer\ErrorViewerInstaller.msi from the USB
flash drive to the NX workstation (e.g. D:\drive)
(3) Execute the msi file on the NX workstation.
(4) Follow the installation instructions on the screen.
NOTE:
The error viewer is an interface for the operator of the digitizer. It does not only show
errors, but also digitizer status messages for the user.
2.5 Configuring the NX Workstation with Default Settings
(1) On the NX workstation go to:

Control panel
Set:
View by: Small Icons
Figure 11

(2) Select: Control panel 

Date and Time.
(3) Adapt date and time.
Figure 12
(4) Select:
Control panel  Network
and Sharing Center 
Local Area Connection 
Properties  Internet
Protocol Version 4
(TCP/IPv4)  Properties
Set:
- IP address: 192.192.192.193
- Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
For detailed instructions refer to

the NX Workstation Service
Manual chapter 4, Installation.
Figure 13

(5) Select: Control panel 

System  Change Settings
 Change
Set computer name: DefaultNX
Figure 14
NOTE:
For details to the following steps refer to the latest NX Workstation service manual in
Agfa HealthCare Library: <Computed Radiography  CR Workstation
Software>
(6) Copy the application license file (ALF) to the NX workstation directory
C:\AGFA\Healthcare\NX\Configuration\Licensing).
(7) Enable the ALF-file with the License Manager.
(8) Start NX Activation Utility from the

desktop..
(9) During the "Activation process"
change the “Available Dose Types”
from <LGM> to <EI>.
(10) Select <None> as "Available Twain
Digitizer" and follow the
instructions on the screen.
(11) Start the NX Configuration Tool.
Figure 15
(12) Go to: General Settings  Configure Workstation Settings 

Workstation Settings

(13) Following step is required for CR 30-X 2nd only (not for CR 30-Xm): Check
the software on the USB flash drive: The software, which is also installed on
the digitizer, is located in a directory \CIR_1103 (or higher version).
(14) Depending on the digitizer software version, adapt the workstation settings as
shown in following table:
# Parameter Value for CR 30-X 2nd Value for CR 30-X 2nd SW ≥

SW < CIR_1203 CIR_1203 and CR 30-Xm
1 ID station name DefaultNX DefaultNX
2 Performed Station AE Title NX_DefaultNX NX_DEFAULT
3 Processing station name local host local host
4 Port 104 104
5 Default Modality CR CR
6 Fast Preview Settings - AE FAST_DefaultNX FAST_DEFAULT
Title
7 Fast Preview Settings - 3729 3729
Port number
8 Enable Fast-ID Checkbox must be Checkbox must be activated
activated
9 Fast ID - AE Title FASTID_DEFAULTNX IDEN_DEFAULT
10 Fast ID - Port number 3216 3216
NOTE:
In the NX Configuration Tool the workstation IP address and Subnet mask are not
editable. Make sure that the correct IP address and Subnet mask are indicated as
configured in step (4) of this section.
(15) Go to Devices  Digitizer in the NX Configuration Tool.
(16) Enter the data for Recovery Exposure Types according to the customer
needs. Example:
- Age Group 17+
- Exam Group: Chest
- Exposure Type: Chest PA

(17) In the same window select <New>

to add a new digitizer.
(18) Enter following data in the "Add
Digitizer" window.
- Name: DIG_DEFAULT
- Type: CR 30-X DICOM or
CR 30-Xm Figure 16
See also NOTE below:
NOTE:
 Digitizer type CR 30-X DICOM corresponds to CR 30-X 2nd.
 In software NX 2.0.8600 / 3.0.8600 the Mammography digitizer CR 30-Xm is not in
the list of digitizer types. To add the CR 30-Xm in the list proceed as follows:
Step 1: Download the CR 30-Xm model file from the Agfa HealthCare Library:
Computed Radiography > CR Digitizers > CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm
Step 2: Copy the model file to the NX workstation (e.g. D:\ drive)
Step 3: In the "Add digitizer" screen (see Figure 16) upload and select the model file.
(19) Depending on the digitizer software version, adapt the digitizer settings as
shown in following table:
# Parameter Value for CR 30-X 2nd Value for CR 30-X 2nd SW ≥

SW < CIR_1203 CIR_1203 and CR 30-Xm
1 Name: DEFAULTDXM DIG_DEFAULT
2 Enable Fast ID Checkbox must be activated Checkbox must be activated
3 Device settings: 192.192.192.192 192.192.192.192
IP Address
4 Device Settings: DEFAULTDXM DIG_DEFAULT
AE Title:
5 Device settings: 192.192.100.1 192.192.192.1
Default Router
6 Device settings: 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
Subnet Mask

(20) Enter the data in the Device Configuration  Digitizer 

Emergency Procedure window according to the customer needs.
The following table just shows an example:
# Parameter Value
1 Age Group: 17+
2 Exam Group: Chest
3 Exposure Type: Chest PA
(21) Select in the NX Configuration Tool Menu:

Devices  ID Tablet Configuration  ID Tablet
(22) Select: <Delete>
(23) Select in the NX Configuration Tool Menu:
User Interface  Editing Settings  Configure Normal Mode
& Print Mode
(24) Following step is only required for NX software version < NX 2.0.8700 /
3.0.8700: Change value for Content: LGM:(0018,1405) to
EI:(0018,1411)
(25) Activate the configuration. This will restart the NX Software.
After the reboot of the NX workstation the red blinking LED at the digitizer
changes to green. This indicates a connection to the NX workstation.
2.6 Testing Standalone Installation
(1) Insert an unexposed cassette in the digitizer.

(2) Identify the cassette: Scanning starts.
(3) Check, if the image arrives at the NX Workstation:
 If the image arrives at the NX Workstation, the system works and the
installation was successful.
 If the image did not arrive at the NX Workstation, troubleshoot as described
in CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm Service Manual, chapter 3.3, Troubleshooting.

2.7 Filling in Site specific Data
(1) Select: <Site Specific Data>

(2) Enter the site specific data.
(3) Select <OK> to save the data.
(4) Select <cancel> at request to
renew the external backup.
Figure 17
2.8 Checking Software Version
(1) Select: <Main Device Info>
Figure 18
(2) Check software version.

Make sure that the latest software version is installed. For more information how
to perform a software upgrade refer to the installation instructions which are
enclosed to the software on the Agfa HealthCare Library.

2.9 Configuring the Maintenance Indicator (Optional)
NOTE:
Only perform the following steps if you want to activate the maintenance indicator.
(1) Select: <Maintenance Indicator>

(2) Active the maintenance indicator (default = Off).
“On” (checkbox selected) means:

 Customer will be reminded daily or when starting the Control PC
to perform a preventive maintenance via following message:
o "Maintenance interval will expire within a short time. Please contact
service."
This message appears approximately 12 weeks before the defined
maintenance due date or due cycles (Default: 2 years / 30.000 cycles)
are reached.
o "Maintenance interval expired. Please contact service."
This messages appears, when the maintenance due date or
due cycles are expired is counter is reached.
“Off” means:
 Maintenance indicator is deactivated. The customer will not be reminded to
perform a preventive maintenance.
(3) If required adapt the target values for "Operating hours" and "Cycles" according
to the local terms of the service agreement.
Figure 19

3 Configuring the Digitizer and the NX Workstation for the

Hospital Network
REQUIRED TIME:
3.1 Adapting the Local Settings and Network Settings at the Digitizer
(1) Select <Digitizer

Settings> and adapt
following parameters:
 Date
 Time
 User Interface Language
(language of the user
messages in the error
viewer)
 IP address (final IP address
in the hospital network)
 Subnet mask
Figure 20
3.2 Adapting the Communication Parameters at the Workstation
(1) On the NX Workstation go to the Windows control panel and configure IP

address, subnet mask and computer name with the information provided by the
hospital.
For detailed instructions refer to chapter 4 of the NX Workstation Service Manual.
(2) Start the NX Configuration Tool.
(3) Adapt the Workstation settings and the digitizer settings with the information
provided by the hospital and activate this configuration on the NX workstation.

3.3 Creating CPF File and Loading it to the Digitizer
(1) Insert the digitizer USB flash

drive (part of delivery) into
USB Port of the NX
Workstation.
(2) Click on <Create CPF> and
save the file on the USB flash
drive root folder.
(3) Release the USB flash drive
from the NX Workstation.
Figure 21

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 22
(6) Plug the USB flash drive into

the USB slot of the digitizer;
see Figure 17.
(7) Close the cassette unit.
(8) Wait until the Digitizer starts up.
5175_c35_094a.cdr
Figure 23

(9) On the NX workstation start the internet explorer.

(10) Enter the new digitizer IP address in the address window and press “enter”.
The digitizer service user interface opens.
(11) Select: <Digitizer Settings>
(12) Select <Remove Destinations> to delete the default destination
network settings.
NOTE:
After selecting the button <Remove Destinations> the button <Load Data from
USB stick> is active; see next step.
(13) Select: <Load Data from USB Stick>

(14) Select the digitizer from the list.
(15) Select <OK>.
(16) Reboot the digitizer.
Figure 24

4 Completion of Installation
This section describes the tasks that are required to prepare the digitizer for hand-over
to the clinical application specialist.
# Task Section
1 Checking the technical image quality of the digitizer. 4.1
3 Confirming the installation date of the digitizer software. 4.2
3 Performing a backup. 4.3
4 Storing the USB flash drive in its cover. 4.4
5 Handing-over the system to the Clinical Application 4.5
Specialist.
REQUIRED TIME:
4.1 Checking the Technical Image Quality of the System
4.1.1 Selecting the required Cassettes
Selecting the cassettes and modality for exposure of the flatfield(s) depends on the
application type of the installed system:
Application Required Cassette Exposure at

Type Modality Type
Genrad only  Largest available Genrad cassette Genrad
Genrad and  Largest available Genrad cassette and Genrad
Mammography
 Mammography cassette 24x30 cm and
 Mammography cassette 18x24 cm (if
available)
Mammography  Mammography cassette 24x30 cm and Mammography
only
 Mammography cassette 18x24 cm
(if available)

4.1.2 Checking the Image Plate(s) before Exposure
(1) Open the cassette with the

dedicated key or a pen.
517509ag.cdr
Figure 25
(2) Open the shutter.

1
(3) Turn the cassette around, so that
the black tube side is above. 2
(4) Let the black tray and image plate

slide out carefully onto the table.
1
517509ad.cdr
Figure 26
(5) Put the black tray with the image

plate onto the cassette.
(6) Check the image plate for any
contaminations or signs of damage
(e.g. dust particles, scratches).
Figure 27
(7) If the image plate is contaminated clean it with CR Phosphor Plate Cleaner and a
soft lint-free cloth or Polynit wipes.
If the image plate is damaged take another cassette and inform the customer.
IMPORTANT:
When using CR Phosphor Plate Cleaner: Do not pour the CR Phosphor
Plate Cleaner directly on the image plate. Always pour the CR Phosphor
Plate Cleaner on the lint-free cloth.
(8) Wait approximately 10 minutes until the surface is dry.

(9) Verify that the white phosphor side

is oriented to the black tube side
of the cassette.
(10) Put the image plate back into the
cassette so that the shutter does 1 White phosphor side
not scratch over the image plate.
2
Black tube side of the cassette

517509af.cdr
Figure 28
(11) Insert the key or a pen into the cassette.

(12) Close the shutter
(13) Remove the key.
4.1.3 Erasing the Cassette
(1) Press the Erase button.
The Digitizer switches to erase

mode. The status indicator is
continuously lighting up in blue.
5175_c01_006.ai
Figure 29
(2) Put the cassette in the digitizer:

Erasing starts.
5175_c01_005.ai
Figure 30
(3) Remove the cassette with the erased image plate from the cassette output.

4.1.4 Creating the Flatfield Test Image at a Genrad Modality
NOTE:
Use a Genrad modality for exposure of the cassette(s), if the system is used for
Genrad or mixed use (Genrad and Mammography). For details refer to section 4.1.1.
(1) Mount the 1,5 mm Cu-filter at the

modality
(2) Place the Genrad cassette with the
black side facing up.
(3) Ensure that the entire image plate Cu filter
is fully exposed. The collimated
field must be larger than the image 1,3 m Black side
plate. facing up
Collimated
area
5175_c36_001.cdr
Figure 31
(4) Select the following exposure parameters to obtain a dose of 10 µGy:

 12 mAs
 75 kVp
 1.3 m (51,2”) distance
 Large focus
(5) Expose the cassette.
(6) Turn the cassette 180° (black side still facing up).
(7) Expose the cassette again.
After the second exposure the cassette has been exposed in total
with a dose of approximately 20 µGy.
(8) Repeat steps (2) to (7) with the Mammography cassettes (both formats, if
available).
(9) Remove the Cu-filter from the X-ray device.

4.1.5 Creating the Flatfield Test Image at a Mammography Modality
NOTE:
Only use a Mammography modality for exposure of the cassette(s), if the system is
used for Mammography exclusively.
If the system is used for Genrad, too, make all exposures for the flatfield image at the
Genrad modality.
For details refer to section 4.1.1.
(1) Using adhesive tape, mount the

Al-filter at the modality.
(2) Insert the Mammography cassette
with the black side facing up.
Figure 32
(3) Select the following exposure parameters:

 200 mAs
 28 kVp
 Mo / Mo
(5) Repeat the exposure for the other cassette format, if available.
(6) Remove the Al-filter from the X-ray device.

4.1.6 Scanning the Flatfield Image
(1) Insert the exposed cassette in the digitizer.

(2) At the NX workstation select the examination type:
For Genrad: <System Diagnosis  Flatfield> or
For Mammography: <System Diagnosis Mammo  Flatfield Mammo>
(3) Identify the cassette.
(4) Wait until the digitizer has finished the scan process.
(5) Print the image or send it to the archive (depending on what is available).
IMPORTANT:
By selection of examination type "System Diagnosis", the correct settings for image
processing of the flatfield are used. Any other examination type may give a result which
cannot be used to evaluate the flatfield image.
4.1.7 Checking the Images at the Lightbox or Viewing Station
NOTE:
Checking the images and comparing to the limit patterns may only happen on
lightboxes and viewing stations that comply with the specified installation and
configuration conditions for diagnostic reading. For details please refer to the
respective instructions of the viewing stations / light boxes.
NOTE:
The slow scan direction is always parallel to the short side of the image plate
(except 35 x 35 cm cassettes). Due to the hanging protocol* the appearance of the
saved flatfield might differ from the physical orientation of the cassette as it has
entered the digitizer.
 The hanging protocol (DICOM expression) defines the format and presentation
how the images are displayed on the monitor.
43 cm 30 cm 30 cm 24 cm
15 cm 18 cm
24 cm
Slow scan 35 cm
direction
517509ab.cdr
Figure 33

(1) Check the image quality of the flatfield for the following artifacts:
 Stripes in fast scan or slow scan direction
 Large area inhomogeneities
 Unacceptable number of white dots.
Evaluation:
(1) If the scanned flatfield does not show one of the artifacts, no further action
is required.
(2) If the scanned flatfield shows one of the artifacts compare the flatfield with the
limit pattern. For detailed instructions refer to chapter 3.2, Tools and auxiliary
Means.
IMPORTANT:
If a FLFS cassette for flatfield exposure is used, the image will be slightly darker
in the upper and lower image area where the backscatter protection is removed
(approximately 1 cm each). These darker zones also have to be used for image
quality evaluation in slow scan and fast scan direction.
Flatfield with Genrad Cassette Flatfield with FLFS Cassette
Effect exaggerated
Genrad Cassette FLFS Cassette
Backscatter
FLFS
Protection
10 mm
10 mm
FLFS
Figure 34

4.2 Confirming the Installation Date of the Digitizer
(1) Click <Logout>.

(2) Select <Installation> and click: <Yes>
Figure 35
(3) Confirm completion of installation by clicking: <Yes>
Figure 36

4.3 Performing a Backup
(1) Pull out the cassette unit.

(2) Plug the USB flash drive into
the USB slot of the digitizer.
5175_c35_094a.cdr
Figure 37
(4) In service menu <Backup>

select <Complete backup>
and <SAVE TO USB>.
(5) Unplug the USB flash drive
when the message is
displayed: Remove USB
flash drive.
Figure 38

4.4 Storing the USB Flash Drive
(1) Open the cassette unit.

(2) Remove the top cover.
A
(3) Put the USB flash drive (A) in
its box and mount the
screw (B).
(4) Mount the top cover.
B
5175_c35_backup5.cdr
Figure 39
4.5 Hand-over of the System to the Clinical Application Specialist
(1) Inform the Clinical Application Specialist about:

 Completion of technical installation
 Any irregularities during the installation
 The required activities as described in following table
# Activity Section
1 In case the system is used for Mammography: Perform 4.5.1
Mammography specific tasks.
2 Setup connectivity to additional system components 4.5.2
(RIS, PACS, Hardcopy, etc.).
3 Customize system components according to customer 4.5.3
preferences.
4 Train the customer. 4.5.4
5 Perform further activities depending on local regulations. 4.5.5
NOTE:
To get access to the Agfa HealthCare Library or to get a copy of the required
documents contact your local service manager.
External partners: Contact your local Agfa representative.

4.5.1 Performing Mammography specific Configurations and Tests
(1) In case the system is used for Mammography: Perform Mammography specific
configurations and tests.
For details see the Service Manual "CR Mammography Solution based on
CR30-Xm" on the Agfa HealthCare Library > Computed Radiography >
CR Mammography Systems > CR Mammo Solution (CR 30-Xm)
4.5.2 Setup of Connectivity to additional System Components
(2) Use the corresponding connectivity release documents for setup of additional
system components, see Agfa HealthCare Library path*:
<General Info  Connectivity & Application>
* External partners: Contact your local Agfa representative.
(3) Setup the connectivity to the additional system components as described in

the connectivity release documents.
4.5.3 Customizing System Components according to Customer Preferences
For instructions how to customize the system components refer to the corresponding
connectivity document and service manual of the system component.
4.5.4 Customer Training
(1) Hand-over the user manuals. The user manuals are also available on CD ROM
which is part of delivery.
(2) Train the customer in following activities:
 Operating the digitizer, see section 4.5.4.1.
 Usage of plates and cassettes, see section 4.5.4.2.

4.5.4.1 Training for Operating the Digitizer
Following items have to be part of the training for digitizer operation:

 The user interface (Status indicator / error viewer at NX workstation)
 Switching on/off/reset the digitizer
 Power and network connector
 Boot-up procedure
 Basic workflow
 Erasing image plates
 Retrieving Information about the digitizer
 Troubleshooting and errors during operation
NOTE:
For more information refer to the CR 30-X 2nd User Manual.
For NX workstation specific training refer to the NX workstation user documentation.
4.5.4.2 Training for Usage of Plates and Cassettes
Following items have to be part of the training for usage of plates and cassettes:
 Labels and functional elements of the cassettes
 How to detect Full Leg / Full Spine Cassettes (if available on site)
 First use and normal operation
 Storage and transport
 Operating conditions
 Cleaning
NOTE:
For more information refer to the user manual "CR 30-X/CR 30-Xm Plates and
Cassettes".

4.5.5 Performing further Activities depending on local Regulations
Enclosed a list of possible activities depending on local regulations:

This list is just an example.
# Activity Reference
1 Electrical check IEC 62353:2007 Test Documentation on
the Agfa HealthCare Library (Extranet Link /
Intranet Link)
2 Acceptance Test Example for Germany: DIN6868
(1) Contact your local service manager concerning the activities which are required
due to local regulations.

5 Installation Checklist
# Step Reference Okay Task

code*
Installation Prerequisites
1. Check installation site prerequisites. 1.1 PRI**
2. Prepare the required tools. 1.2 PRI
3. Unpack digitizer. 1.3 INS***
4. Check shipment completeness. 1.4 INS
Connecting the Digitizer to the NX Workstation

5. Connect cables. 2.1 INS
6. Switch on the digitizer. 2.2 INS
7. Take out the digitizer USB flash drive 2.3 INS
8. Install the error viewer 2.4 INS
Configure the NX workstation with default
9. 2.5 INS
settings.
10. Test the standalone installation. 2.6 INS
11. Fill in site specific data. 2.7 INS
12. Check software version. 2.8 INS
13. Configure the Maintenance Indicator (Optional). 2.9 INS
Configuring the Digitizer and the NX Workstation for the Hospital Network
Adapt local settings and network settings at the
14. 3.1 INS
digitizer
Adapt communication parameters at the NX
15. 3.2 INS
workstation.
16. Create CPF file and load it to the digitizer. 3.3 INS
* Task Code, only applicable for Agfa employees

** PRI = Pre-Installation
*** Ins = Installation task

# Step Reference Okay Task

code*
Completion of Installation
17. Check technical image quality of the digitizer. 4.1 INS
18. Confirm the installation date of the digitizer. 4.2 INS
19. Perform a backup. 4.3 INS
20. Store USB flash drive in its cover 4.4 INS

Hand-over the system to the Clinical Application
21. 4.5 INS
Specialist.
Further activities:
In case the system is used for Mammography:
22. Perform Mammography specific configurations 4.5.1 ASC
and tests.
Setup connectivity to additional system
23. 4.5.2 ASC
components (RIS, PACS, Hardcopy, etc).
Customize system components according to
24. 4.5.3 ASC
customer preferences.
25. Train the customer. 4.5.4 ATR***
Perform for further activities depending on
26. 4.5.5 ABA****
local regulations.

** ASC = Configuration & Customization
*** ATR = Customer training
***** ABA = Acceptance Testing

Chapter 2
HEALTHCARE Functional Description
Imaging Services
Software / Hardware Compatibility Chart
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
CR 30-Xm
Type 5179 / 100
► Please note
The chapter “Software / Hardware Compatibility” has been replaced by following

documents:
• Solution Structure Data Document, Document ID* 30781759
• CR/DR Interoperability Matrix, Document ID* 31333326
* Access the document by entering the document ID in the Agfa HealthCare Library search window,
or follow the direct link.

service_bulletin_cover_e_template_v03
DD+DIS230.10E Software / Hardware Compatibility
This page is intentionally left blank to enable print out of even and odd pages on duplex printers.

HEALTHCARE Chapter 2
Imaging Services Functional Description

CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
CR 30-Xm
Type 5179 / 100
This document explains the functional principle including the functions of the individual
assemblies under normal conditions.

Revision Date
1.1 02-2012 Added CR 30-Xm.
Document Title
Not applicable

eq_02_functional_e_template_v07
DD+DIS230.10E Functional Description
► Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 München
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(see Agfa HealthCare Library => General Info => Agfa HealthCare =>
Publications => Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or
maintenance task on the equipment.
the product.
NOTE:
To verify the latest version of single documents and of Service Manuals refer to the
Document Type ‘Order List’ in the Agfa HealthCare Library.

Edition 1, Revision 1 CR 30-X 2nd, Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225 Chapter 2 / 2
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 THE CR 30-X SYSTEM IN A NUTSHELL ................................................................................4

1.1 System Overview ......................................................................................................................4
1.2 Intended Use of the Digitizer.....................................................................................................5
1.3 Applications...............................................................................................................................5
1.4 Main Components of the Digitizer.............................................................................................6
1.5 Main Functions of the NX Workstation .....................................................................................7
1.6 Main Components of the Cassette with Image Plate................................................................8
2 WORKFLOW OF THE CR 30-X 2ND SYSTEM .....................................................................10

3 HARDWARE COMPONENTS OF THE DIGITIZER ...............................................................11
4 BOOT-UP OF THE DIGITIZER ..............................................................................................13
5 DESCRIPTION OF THE IP RUN............................................................................................14
5.1 Stall Detection in a Nutshell ....................................................................................................19
5.2 Calibration Board Functions in a Nutshell...............................................................................20
5.3 Drawer Unit Functions in a Nutshell .......................................................................................21

1 The CR 30-X System in a Nutshell
1.1 System Overview
The CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm digitizer is Digitizer

part of the CR 30-X system, comprising: Cassette
 Digitizer
 NX Workstation
 Cassette(s) with image plate(s)
517500ab.cdr
NX Workstation
Figure 1
1.2 Overview of available CR 30-X Digitizers
The table enclosed lists the main differences of the different CR 30-X digitizers.
Digitizer Name Commercial Type Number Scan Application

in the Service Name Resolution
Manual
CR 30-X 5175 / 200
CR 30-X 2nd CR 30-x* 5175 / 205 100 µm Genrad only
No name 5175 / 220 / 225
CR 30-Xm CR 30-Xm 5179 / 100 100 µm Genrad and
(Genrad) Mammography
50 µm
(Mammo)
*Digitizer type 5175 / 205 as well as type 5175 / 225 have lower throughput. See chapter 11,
Installation Planning.
NOTE:
The first version of CR 30-X (Type 5175 / 100 / 105 / 110 / 120
/ 125) with FireWire interface is not part of this manual.
Figure 2

1.3 Intended Use of the Digitizer
This device must only be used to scan exposed X-ray cassettes, containing an
erasable image plate (IP). The digitizer is part of a system, consisting of X-ray
cassettes with erasable phosphor image plates and a workstation where the X-ray
cassettes are identified and the resulting digital image information is further processed
and routed. It is intended that this device is only operated in a radiological environment
by qualified staff.
1.4 Applications
The CR 30-X 2nd digitizer is suited for following applications and environments:
Applications:
 Genrad
 FLFS
 Veterinary
 Mammography (CR 30-Xm only)
Environments:
 X-ray rooms (inside/outside)
 Private radiologist sites
 Clinics
 Imaging centers
 Emergency rooms (Genrad only)
 Intensive Care (Genrad only)
 Mobile environments
 Military field hospitals

1.5 Main Components of the Digitizer
The digitizer consists of following main components:
# Component Name Purpose

1 Cassette Unit Clamps, opens and closes the cassette.
Reads the information which is stored on the cassette
RF Tag via chip reader.
Writes the status “erased “on the cassette RF tag via
chip reader after erasure.
2 Transport Unit including Transports the Image Plate from cassette to slow scan
Erasure Unit unit and back.
Erases the image plate while it is driven back.
3 Slow Scan Unit Driving the image plate continuously during scanning.
4 Optic Module Creates a continuous, pivoting laser beam. This beam
stimulates the Image Plate to emit blue light.
5 Light Collector with Collects the blue emitted light, transfers it to the tube of
PMT the photomultiplier and converts the emitted light into
an electrical signal.
6 CPMI Board Is the main board of the digitizer. Serves as the
network interface to the NX workstation.
7 Handling Control Board Controls the image plate (IP) run.
CR 30-X 2nd Photo Multiplier Interface

(CPMI) Board Photo Multiplier Tube
(PMT)
Optic Module
Handling Control
Light
Board
Polygon Mirror Collector
Cassette Laser Diode
Unit
Slow Scan
IP Run Unit
Chip
Reader 517502ba.cdr
Transport Erasure Calibration

Unit Unit Board
Figure 3

1.6 Main Functions of the NX Workstation
The NX Workstation is the central element of a CR (Computed radiography) system.

The NX Workstation is a standalone CR workstation. It is used for:
 Acquiring images from the digitizer
 Selecting patients from a worklist provided by a RIS (Radiologic Information
System) and writing patient and examination data on the cassette RF tag during
Identification.
 Performing automatic Musica (Multiscale Image Contrast Amplification) Image
Processing based on predefined, examination based parameters
 Modifying the image appearance of acquired images
 Performing quality control of the images of the X-Ray department
 Transferring images for diagnosis to a hardcopy printer or softcopy station and
to a PACS (Picture Archiving and Communication System) system for archiving
 Burning images on CD ROM
DICOM
“Manual” Data Transfer
PACS
Cassette Softcopy
NX Workstation
Digitizer
X-Ray Modality Hardcopy

CD ROM 517502bd.cdr
Figure 4

1.7 Main Components of the Cassette with Image Plate
The complete cassette consists of:

 Cassette
 Image Plate
 Tray
The cassette can be opened via a lock. See part A and D in Figure 5.
A cassette label allows the customer to label the cassette.
The tray is used as carrier to pull out the image plate and put it back into the cassette.
The drawer unit of the digitizer docks at three metal docking elements by three
magnets and pulls out the tray for approximately 3 cm. Five rubber stops keep the
image plate in place when the cassette is closed, see part B in Figure 5.
The rubber stops are mounted on “spring loaded” arms of the tray: When the tray is
pulled out of the cassette by the drawer, these arms move down to release the image
plate. When the drawer moves the tray back, these “spring loaded” arms move up, to
keep the tray in place by the mounted rubber stops. This ensures, that the image plate
is pushed back when pushing at the tray.
Each tray has a fixed RF-Tag attached. See part B in Figure 5.
RF Tag and image plate belong together.
The red part of the cassette has a lead layer built in for back scatter protection.
The black side is the tube side. See part C in Figure 5.
A B
Cassette Image plate
Label 2
1
Tray
2
RF-tag
Lock
1
1
Metal Docking
2 Elements
2 Rubber Pieces
Shutter
Shutter Tube Side
C D
Cassette with
red Cover
removed
Locking Bar
Lock
517502be.cdr
Note: Illustration shows Genrad cassette only. See next page for difference to Mammography cassette.
Figure 5

1.8 Comparison of Genrad Cassette Set with Mammography Cassette Set
Genrad Cassette Set Mammography Cassette Set

Cassette name(s)* MD4.0T, MD4.0T FLFS MM3.0T
Image plate type* Powder IP: MD4.0 Powder IP: MM3.0
Image plate shape square square with "nose" **.
See Figure 6
Available sizes 15x30 cm, 18x24 cm, 18x24 cm, 24x30 cm
24x30 cm, 35x35 cm,
35x43 cm
FLFS: 35x43 cm
Cassette can be opened No Yes. See Figure 7.
for cleaning
Recommended image Once a month Once a week or every 200
plate cleaning frequency cycles
Image plate cleaning AGFA CR Phosphor Plate cleaner and a soft lint-free
agent cellulose cloth or Polynit wipes (Polynit wipes are soaked
with a cleaning agent)
* Names for cassettes and image plates may change.
** Function of the "nose": Ensures that the image plate is shifted towards the chest wall side.
CR MD4.0T tray and image plate: CR MM3.0T tray and image plate:
Image plate Image plate

"Nose"
RF-tag (backside) RF-tag (backside)
Tray Tray
Figure 6: Image plate and tray for Genrad / Mammography cassettes
Opening a Mammography cassette for

C
Cleaning:
B
(1) Open the shutter of the cassette with
the dedicated key and remove tray
with IP.
(2) Open the cassette locks (A) on the A
left and right side.
(3) Lift up the shutter (B) and remove the
Figure 7
cover (C).

2 Workflow of the CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm System
The following figure shows a workflow of the system:
1
Take exposure
5
Take the cassette
for the next exposure
2
Insert the exposed Cassette
in the Digitizer:
The IP* is prepared
for scanning.
3
Go to the NX Workstation
and select the Patient:
The digitizer starts scanning.
4
*IP = Image Plate
Wait until the IP* cycle
is finished (approx. 1 min.) 517502ah.cdr
Figure 8
Step : Take the exposure.

Step : Insert the exposed cassette into the digitizer.
Step : Go to the NX Workstation. Select the patient from the worklist and select the
ID (Identify) button. The IP cycle starts.
Step : Wait till the IP cycle is finished. This takes approximately 1 minute.
The digitizer sends the image data during scanning (i.e. during the
IP cycle) to the processing station.
Step : Take out the cassette for the next examination.

3 Hardware Components of the Digitizer
The following figure shows the hardware components of the digitizer.
Digitizer
Roller IP
Photomultiplier Cassette Sensor
(PMT) E-Label Calibration Board
Fixation Unit
Cass. Opener
E-Label
Sensor*
Photomultiplier Optics Board Gearbox
Module (PMM) Board (Optic Module) E-Label Lift Ref. Pos.
E-Label
Sensor
CAN Bus Handling Control Board

CPMI Board
CF Card E-Label
RF-Tag Erasure LED

CPMI Power Reader Control Board
Distribution Board
User Interface
Board
Power Supply (24 V)
517502bc.cdr
Ethernet In CR 30-X 2nd Cass. Opener Sensor introduced in 1st half of 2012*
Power
NX Workstation Data
(and Power)
Figure 9
The following table lists the functions of the different components.
Component Name Function

Calibration Board Keeps a BOL (Begin of Line) and EOL (End of Line) sensor to trigger
the timing for digitizing of the scanned image.
Keeps 18 sensors to determine correction factors for digitizing of the
image.
Cassette Fixation Unit Keeps the E-Label for the Cassette Fixation Unit. The E-Label is
E-Label Board programmed in production and keeps (amongst other parameters) the
width of this specific Cassette Fixation Unit.
Cassette Opener Detects the cassette opener "open position".
Sensor

Component Name Function

CF Card Compact Flash (CF) Card with special characteristics (industrial
standard) for the usage in the digitizer.
Keeps the software of the digitizer.
CPMI Board (CR 30- Main board of the digitizer: Loads the operating system from CF card
X Photomultiplier into the RAM.
Interface) Controls scanning.
Converts the analog voltage from the PMM Board into 20 bit linear
and further 16 bit root compressed values.
Contains network and USB interface.
CPMI Power Converts the 24 V input voltage from the power supply to the
Distribution Board appropriate voltage for following consumers:
 CPMI Board
 Photomultiplier incl. PMM Board
 Optic Module
 Calibration Board
Erasure LED Control Controls the LEDS of the Erasure Unit.
Board
Gearbox E-Label Keeps the E-Label for the Gearbox with motor and scan rollers. The
Board E-Label is programmed in production and keeps amongst other
parameters the individual factors for the gear box and the scan roller
factor of this specific gearbox.
Handling Control Controls following functional elements:
Board  All motors
 User Interface Board
 Roller IP Sensor Board
 RF Tag Reader
Lift Reference Detects the reference position of the "slow scan lift motor".
Position Sensor
Optics Board (Optic Controls polygon motor and laser diode of the Optic Module.
Module)
Photomultiplier (PMT) Collects the blue emitted light. Converts the emitted light into an
electrical signal.
Keeps a blue LED to generate a reference signal for sensitivity
correction.
Power Supply (24 V) Supplies 24 V input voltage for the CPMI Power Distribution Board,
Erasure Unit and Handling Control Board.
RF-Tag Reader Reads the cassette RF Tag.
Writes the cassette status after scanning or erasure on the cassette
RF Tag.
Roller IP Sensor Monitors the IP run in the digitizer.
User Interface Board Controls the LEDs of the user interface.

4 Boot-up of the Digitizer
The following flowchart illustrates the boot-up of the digitizer:
Approximate CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm Boot-Up

time in
seconds
Digitizer Audible / visible Effects
0
Switch-On
1
Boot-up of CPMI and

17 Handling Control Board
2
Send Self Test 3
40 Signal to all SW modules
Error message Message 4

Selftest okay? in Error Viewer. “Digitizer start-up”
NO Boot-up stops (4198) in Error Viewer
YES
IP Clean-up LED red blinking
43 5
Cycle
Motors
are
Cassette or IP Warning message audible
found? YES in Error Viewer
Rescue Cycle: Digitizer
NO
tries to solve problem.
Initialize all Modules:
64 Set all motors to HOME
Error message
Initialization okay? in Error Viewer.
NO Boot-up stops
YES
6 Wait till the Digitizer

NX Viewer NO
receives "ready for
running?
green on
identification” message
LED
YES
65 Digitizer idle 1 to 6 : See comments next page.

517502bb.cdr
Figure 10

# Comment
1 After 1 second the status LED starts red blinking.
2 During these 33 seconds the digitizer performs following actions:
 The internal logging and error messages are loaded.
 The data in the E-labels are compared with the E-label data on the disk.
The status LED stays red blinking. No audible actions. No message in the
Error Viewer.
3 Send self test signal to all SW modules means: Check whether all consumers
are connected. Click sounds of motors are audible.
4 Message “Digitizer start-up” is displayed in the Error Viewer.
This message is generated by the digitizer and will not be displayed however,
if the error viewer is not started-up yet.
5 During the IP Clean-up cycle motors are audible.
6 If the NX viewer is not running following message appears in the Error Viewer:
“Image processing software is not available. Restart the image processing
software”. The check whether the NX is running is repeated each 3 seconds.
5 Description of the IP Run
This section describes the Image Plate (IP) run of the digitizer for a default scan cycle.
The user inserts the cassette with image

plate (IP) into the digitizer.
The edge detection sensor detects the 2
cassette. 1
3
The status LED changes from green to
red blinking.
The cassette fixing motor (M1) fixes the
cassette. 2
517502za.cdr 1
The chip reader reads the RF tag:
Timings are adapted according to the Figure 11
image plate size. 3

The cassette locker motor (M17)*

unlocks the cassette shutter. 4
517502zb.cdr
Figure 12
The cassette opener motor (M3) opens

the cassette. 5
Motors M17 and M3 detect the end and 5
home position via “Stall Detection”.
Exception: At digitizers manufactured as
of first half of 2012, the motor M3 detects
the end position via cassette opener
sensor.
See also section 5.1, Stall Detection in a
Nutshell.
517502zc.cdr
Figure 13
The drawer unit motor (M4)* drives the

drawer unit towards the
opened cassette. 6
The drawer docks at the tray with its 6
magnets.
Drawer docks
at the tray
via 3 magnets
517502zd.cdr
*Motor is also controlled via stall detection. Figure 14

Details see section 5.1.

The cassette locker motor (M17)*

releases the tray.
image plate with tray out of the cassette 7
approximately 3 cm until it is positioned
between the first roller pair of the
transport unit. 7
517502ze.cdr
Figure 15
The roller clamping motor (M6)* closes

the gap between the upper and lower
rollers.
The transport roller motor (M5) drives the 8
image plate until it is detected by the
Roller IP sensor. 8
Now the IP run stops and waits until the
user selects the ID button at the NX
517502ze.cdr
workstation.
Figure 16
When the user selects the ID button at

the NX workstation, the transport roller
motor (M5) continues to transfer the
image plate towards the slow scan unit.
The slow scan lift motor (M7) lifts the
upper front roller, while the alignment bar 9
lifts up to align the image plate before
scanning. 9
The roller clamping motor (M6)* lowers
the lower transport rollers. The transport 517502zf.cdr
roller motor (M5) stops.
*Motor is controlled via stall detection. Figure 17

The slow scan lift motor (M7) lowers the

upper front roller and lifts the upper rear
roller. With this movement the alignment
bar releases the IP. 10
The slow scan motor (M2) transports the 10
image plate through the slow scan unit.
The calibration board detects the leading
edge of the image plate: Scanning starts.
The first lines of the preview image are
visible on the NX workstation.
See also section 5.2, Calibration Board 517502zg.cdr
Functions in a Nutshell.
Figure 18
Scanning stops when the calibration

board detects the trailing edge of
the IP. 11
Now the direction of the slow scan motor
(M2) changes: The image plate is driven
back.
11
517502zh.cdr
Figure 19
The roller IP sensor detects the image

plate.
The roller clamping motor (M6)* closes
the gap between the upper and lower
rollers. 12
The transport roller motor (M5) drives the
image plate towards the cassette, while
the erasure unit erases the cassette. 12 517502zi.cdr
The power of the LEDs is controlled Figure 20

depending on the examination (and so
depending on the X-ray dose).
*Motor is controlled via stall detection.


tray into the cassette.
For details see section 5.3, Drawer Unit
Functions in a Nutshell.
When the end position is reached, the
cassette locker motor (M17)* drives in 13
end position to fixate the tray with IP. 13
The drawer unit motor (M4)* drives in 517502zj.cdr
home position. The magnets get

removed from the tray.
Figure 21
With cassette locking motor (M17)* still in

end position, the cassette opener motor
(M3) closes the cassette shutter. 14 14
The cassette locker motor (M17) drives
in home position: The cassette is locked.
The chip reader writes status “erased” on
the RF Tag.
The cassette fixing motor (M1)* releases
the cassette.
The status LED changes from red
517502zk.cdr
blinking to green.
The scan cycle is finished. Figure 22
*Motor is controlled via stall detection.


5.1 Stall Detection in a Nutshell
Stall detection means: Motor stall (home/end position) detection without the use of
additional sensors. It is made by evaluation of the stepper motor control curve on the
motor controller (Each motor has its own motor controller on the Handling Control
Board).
Advantage compared to home/end position detection via light sensors:
 Monitoring of motor run not only in home and end position, but also between home
and end position (except acceleration / deceleration time)
 Less sensors and cabling
Functional principle of stall detection:
 When the stepper motor is accelerating and decelerating the stall detection is
switched off, as the torque changes to much during this phase.
 When the motor reaches a stable speed, e.g. after 200 steps, the stall detection is
active for a number of steps, e.g. 5000 steps: The motor control curve is evaluated
by the motor controller.
 When the torque increases and reaches a certain "switch off torque", as the motor
reaches the end position, the motor controller detects the stall position and drives
the motor a certain number of steps (e.g. 50 steps) till it stops.
 Rubber stops or similar functional elements at the end position support that the
motor can be driven with relatively high speed towards the end position.
 If the torque increases to the "switch-off" torque before the motor is supposed to
reach the stall position, the motor is stopped. The digitizer issues an error
message (e.g. "IP jam").
 The motor curves shown below are simplified. In reality the motor speed can be
reduced just before the stall position, or can even be reduced in several steps
before it stops.
Figure 23

5.2 Calibration Board Functions in a Nutshell
The calibration board provides following functions:

 Geometric Correction:
To correct irregularities in the optical path, the digitizer measures at each boot-up
the timings of the laser beam between pin diode 1 and 2, 2 and 3 and so on.
As a result a kind of "calibration curve" is created, which influences the frequency
of AD conversion. This corrects non linear movements of the laser beam.
 Jitter Correction:
To correct irregularities in the polygon run, the digitizer measures the timings
between the BOL (Begin Of Line) and EOL (End Of Line) signal during each scan.
 Synchronization of Polygon, Begin of Scan, Begin of Line and AD Window:
When an IP is inserted the polygon starts up. The BOL/EOL sensors measure the
position of the polygon mirrors (they even detect each single facet).
When the IP arrives for scanning, the sensors of the calibration board detect the IP
edge and generate the BOS (Begin Of Scan) signal.
The BOL signal triggers a timer for switching on the laser beam and the AD
(Analog – digital) conversion window. The length of the AD window and "Laser On"
depends on the image plate size.
Laser Diode
6 Facet Polygon
EOL Sensor 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Geometric Correction 10
Sensors (1 to 16) 11
12
13
14
15
16
Calibration Board
BOL Sensor 517502fe.cdr
Figure 24

5.3 Drawer Unit Functions in a Nutshell
The drawer unit has several functional elements for pulling the tray out the cassette
and pushing tray and image plate (IP) back in:
1. Pulling out the tray with IP:
 Via three magnets A the drawer docks at the tray and pulls out the
tray with IP.
Slider
IP Pusher Fingers
517502fd1.cdr
Figure 25
 During scanning the tray stays

connected with the drawer.
517502fd3.cdr
Figure 26
2. Pushing IP and tray back in:

 Via IP pusher fingers mounted at the slider the image plate is pushed back in
the tray. The magnets B keep the slider in the home position during this
movement.

 The rest of the movement back in,

the tray is driven via magnets A
only. Magnets C dock at the lower
transport unit axle. While the drawer
moves forward, the slider moves
backward.
This prevents, that the IP pusher
fingers collide with the cassette.
Slider End Slider Home

Position Position 517502fd2.cdr
Figure 27
 When the magnets A push back the

tray with IP into the cassette, the
Tray Flap Support is moved upwards
to support the center flap.
This ensures, that the rubber stop of
the center flap keeps the IP on the
tray. Rubber stop Image Plate
Tray
Tray Flap Support
517502fd4.cdr
Figure 28

Chapter 2
HEALTHCARE Functional Description
Imaging Services
Software / Hardware Compatibility Chart
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
CR 30-Xm
Type 5179 / 100
► Please note
The chapter “Software / Hardware Compatibility” has been replaced by following

documents:
• CR/DR Interoperability Matrix, Document ID* 31333326

DD+DIS230.10E Software / Hardware Compatibility

Chapter 3.1
HEALTHCARE Repair and Service
Imaging Services
Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instruction
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
CR 30-Xm
Type 5179 / 100
This document describes the product specific safety notes of the digitizer.

Revision Date compared to previous version:
1.1 02-2012 Added CR 30-Xm
Document Title
DD+DIS229.10E CR 30-X 2nd, CR 30-Xm, Service Manual,
Chapter 11 - Installation Planning

eq_03-1_safety-repair_e_template_v09
Repair and Service
DD+DIS230.10E Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instruction
► Manufacturer
Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany
or its affiliates.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
IMPORTANT:
such services.
NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 1 CR 30-X 2nd, Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225 Chapter 3.1 / Page 2 of 21
Repair and Service
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 INTENDED USE .......................................................................................................................4

2 LABELS IN AND ON THE DEVICE ..........................................................................................4
2.1 Labels in the Front ....................................................................................................................4
2.2 Labels in the Rear.....................................................................................................................5
2.3 Labels inside of the Digitizer .....................................................................................................8
2.3.1 Label on the Frame...................................................................................................................8
2.3.2 Label on the Erasure Unit .........................................................................................................8
2.3.3 Label on the Reflector with Brush.............................................................................................9
2.3.4 Label on the Optic Module ......................................................................................................10
3 SAFETY NOTES FOR SERVICE ACTIVITIES ......................................................................12

3.1 General Safety Notes for all Service Activities .......................................................................12
3.2 Safety Notes for Installation Planning.....................................................................................12
3.3 Safety Notes for Installation ....................................................................................................14
3.4 Safety Notes for preventive and corrective Maintenance Work..............................................15
3.5 Safety Notes for Replacements and Repair Procedures ........................................................16
3.5.1 Safety Notes for Replacement at the Base Frame .................................................................16
3.5.2 Replacements in the Cassette Transport Module...................................................................17
3.5.3 Replacements in the Scanner Module....................................................................................17
3.6 Electrical Check after Power Supply Replacement ................................................................19
3.6.1 Basic Protective Earth Test.....................................................................................................19
3.6.2 Electrical Check according to National Regulations ...............................................................21

Repair and Service
1 Intended Use
This device must only be used to scan exposed X-ray cassettes, containing an
erasable image plate (IP).
The digitizer is part of a system, consisting of X-ray cassettes with erasable phosphor
image plates and a workstation where the X-ray cassettes are identified and the
resulting digital image information is further processed and routed.
It is intended that this device is only operated in a radiological environment by
qualified staff.
2 Labels in and on the Device
2.1 Labels in the Front
WARNING:
Risk of hand injuries if cassette edge sensor is activated and hand or finger
is inserted in cassette entry.
• Keep fingers / hand away from cassette unit entry when a cassette
is inserted.
• Do not activate cassette edge
sensor by hand.
Label Meaning
Do not put your fingers in the input slot of
the digitizer; they can get hurt when caught
between the cassette and the fixation.
Insert the cassette as described in the basic

workflow of the digitizer workflow sheets.

Repair and Service
Label Meaning
One sticker on the front cover indicates
the correct cassette positioning when
inserting the cassette.
2.2 Labels in the Rear
CAUTION. Remove power plug.
The manufacturer certifies that this

product conforms to all applicable
provisions of 21 CFR Subchapter J in
effect of the date of manufacture
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
APPAREIL A LASER DE CLASSE 1
LASERKLASSE 1
Contains Transmitter Module

FCC-ID-Nr. HPL5243
Contains Transmitter Module

FCC-ID-Nr. HPL5243
Manufacturer: AGFA - HEALTHCARE N.V.

Septestraat 27 - 2640 - Mortsel - BELGIUM
Refurbished
YYYY-MM
Made in Germany
Peissenberg
MMMMM-YYYY
Figure 1
Label Meaning
This label indicates the laser safety
according Code of Federal Regulations,
title 21, Subchapter J.

Repair and Service
Label Meaning
China RoHS* label EFUP** 50
* Restriction of Hazardous Substances

** Environmental Friendly Use Period
Label Meaning
The type label shows:
• Manufacturer
• Type number
• Serial number (SN XXXXX)
• Input voltage, current and
frequency (100-120 / 220-240 V)
• Production date (YYYY-MM)
• Production site
(Made in Germany / Peissenberg)
• Information about certificates
(CE label etc.)
Label Meaning
Laser class 1 label:
With covers closed the digitizer is a
Class 1 laser product and not
dangerous to the human eye or skin.

Repair and Service
WARNING:
Risk of electrical shock if supplementary earth connector is disconnected with
one hand and the other hand touches a ground connection (e.g. rear cover of
the digitizer).
First switch off the digitizer and remove the mains cable before you remove the
supplementary earth connector.
Label Meaning
Equipotential label
Label Meaning
FCC* label
Contains Transmitter Module * Federal Communications Commission
FCC-ID-Nr. HPL5243
Label
Meaning
Caution! Remove power plug and FCC* rules.
* Federal Communications Commission

Repair and Service
2.3 Labels inside of the Digitizer
2.3.1 Label on the Frame
WARNING:
Improper ground connections inside the device may lead to electric shocks.
Make sure, that the grounding connection to the digitizer frame is present.
Label Meaning
Earth (Ground) Connection
2.3.2 Label on the Erasure Unit
WARNING:
The erasure unit is hot - up to 200 °C:
Risk of burns.
Avoid contact with the Erasure Unit.
Observe the relevant sticker on the Erasure Unit.
Label Meaning
Warning label: Hot area

Repair and Service
CAUTION:
Finger prints on the mirror may cause reduced image quality.
Be careful not to touch the mirror.
Label: Erasure Unit: Bottom side Meaning

Caution label:
Do not touch optical surface.
Label: Erasure Unit: Upper side Meaning
Caution label:
2.3.3 Label on the Reflector with Brush
CAUTION:
Label Meaning
Caution label:

Repair and Service
2.3.4 Label on the Optic Module
WARNING:
120 mW Laser (Class 3B) in the OPTIC MODULE may cause eye injuries.
• Avoid direct and indirect eye contact.
• Do not keep tools in the laser beam when the device is switched on or the
CASSETTE UNIT OPEN SAFETY SWITCH is overridden with a service key:
Risk of reflection.
• Do not open the cover of the OPTIC MODULE.
AGFA Agfa
Agfa DO NOT OPEN
No service / maintenance
OEM Product OPTICS CENTER parts inside
for system integration only
OPTICS CENTER
A G FA
Agfa
Agfa
No service / maintenance
DO NOT OPEN
OP
parts inside
TIK
F8. BAU
AG 517 GRU
FA M-N 5.27 PPE
GE Dat r. 50.X
V AE e XXX
MM XX
RT /JJJ
OEM N. J
for V. Mad
sys Produc e in
tem t Ger
inte man
gra y
tion
onl
y
e
anc
s insimainten
N
OPE
de
No DO NOT
partice /
serv
S CEN aa
TER
Agf
TIC A Agf
F
AG
OP
OPTIKBAUGRUPPE
F8.5175.2750.X
M-Nr. XXXXX
Date MM/JJJJ
AGFA GEVAERT N.V. Made in Germany
5175_c31_002.ai
Figure 2
Label Meaning
Type Label: Optics assembly with:
• Module Serial number
(M-Nr. XXXXX)
• Date of production (MM/JJJJ)

Repair and Service
Label Meaning
Danger label:
Avoid direct exposure to beam.
Label Meaning
Caution label: 3B Laser
Label Meaning
OEM* product label
OEM Product
* OEM = Original Equipment Manufacturer
for system integration only
Label Meaning
Warning label:
No service / maintenance Do not open!
parts inside

Repair and Service
3 Safety Notes for Service Activities
3.1 General Safety Notes for all Service Activities
CAUTION:
Sharp edges inside the digitizer: Cut or abrasion possible.
Be careful at maintenance and replacement of parts.
CAUTION:
Risk of injuries if the cassette unit
open safety switch is overridden
with a service key.
In this case keep your hands and
garment away from the digitizer.
Safety Switch (S2)
Figure 3
3.2 Safety Notes for Installation Planning
Warning:
standby generator.
WARNING:
• At least two persons have to lift the digitizer from one position to the other.
• When removing scanner only one person is needed to lift the digitizer from one
• Use proper shoe and hand protection when lifting the digitizer.

Repair and Service
WARNING:
When different combinations of equipment are used in various medical
environments a potential difference (V) can exist between the protective earths in
different localities. If the protective earthing fails this potential difference can
cause a HAZARD for the OPERATOR or for the PATIENT.
• To comply with ISO 60601-1 (annex I) all computers and peripherals must be
• Always connect the associated monitor to the same Uninterruptible Power
Source (UPS) as the PC.
WARNING:
WARNING:
The structure and stability of the used table need to be suitable in relation with the size
and weight of the system. The table may not be subject to excessive shock and
WARNING:
The digitizer and the cassette storage shall be protected against X-ray radiation this
way, that the annual dose equivalent at the installation place will not exceed 1 mSv.
CAUTION:
Reduced airflow may lead to pollution in the digitizer.
Keep a minimum of 5 cm (2 inches) between rear side of the digitizer and the wall.
At least 50 cm [19.7 in] space has to be provided on the right hand side to allow
cleaning of the scan line with the cleaning brush. This can be performed by the
customer.

Repair and Service
3.3 Safety Notes for Installation
WARNING:
• Lift the digitizer from the sides only. Do not lift at the feed table.
WARNING:
The structure and stability of the used table need to be suitable in relation with the
size and weight of the system. The table may not be subject to excessive shock and
For more information refer to the CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm Service Manual, Installation
Planning document DD+DIS229.10E; see Agfa HealthCare Library:
<Computed Radiography Æ CR Digitizers Æ CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm
Æ Service Manual>
CAUTION:
The accumulated heat developed by the digitizer and the laptop may affect the
Do not place the laptop on top of the digitizer.

Repair and Service
3.4 Safety Notes for preventive and corrective Maintenance Work
WARNING:
During operation the erasure unit is hot: Risk of burns. 200 c
• Avoid contact with the Erasure Unit.

• Observe the relevant sticker on the Erasure Unit.
CAUTION:
Carefully remove the top cover.
CAUTION:
IP jams possible if IP guide plate is deformed.
Do not bend IP guide plate at removal.
CAUTION:
Sensitive surface. Reduced image quality possible due to clouded reflector.
• Do not touch the reflector of the erasure unit by hand.
• Do not use cleaning agents to clean the reflector.
• Only use a lint-free cloth for cleaning.

Repair and Service
3.5 Safety Notes for Replacements and Repair Procedures
3.5.1 Safety Notes for Replacement at the Base Frame
DANGER:
If the power cord is connected and the main switch is switched on the input side
of the power supply is connected to high voltage. Risk of live.
Remove all cables in the rear of the digitizer before opening the rear cover.
DANGER: green/yellow black

If the cables at the input side of the
power supply are mounted wrong,
the housing of the digitizer can be
connected to high voltage. Risk of
live.
Mount the cables at the power supply
input as indicated on the cables and
shown in Figure 4. green/yellow
black
5175_c35_015.cdr
Figure 4
WARNING:
Improper ground connections inside the device or too high leakage current may lead
to electric shocks.
• After any work at the power supply or at any component connected to mains
voltage inform the responsible organization about the necessity of the electrical
test according to national regulations.
CAUTION:

Repair and Service
CAUTION:
If the cables at the output side at
the top of the power supply are
mounted wrong, all printed circuit black red
boards will be defective after
switch-on.
Mount the cables as shown in
Figure 5.
5175_c35_017a.cdr
Figure 5
3.5.2 Replacements in the Cassette Transport Module
CAUTION:
3.5.3 Replacements in the Scanner Module
CAUTION:
CAUTION:

Repair and Service
CAUTION:
The PMT light sensitivity decreases for a certain time (hours to days) if
exposed to bright light.
Expose the light sensitive side of the PMT as little as possible to daylight.
CAUTION:
The light collector can break when mechanically stressed.
Handle the light collector with great care.
CAUTION:
Grounding washer can be lost.
Take care when removing the grounding screw at the PMT board.
CAUTION:
The spring package at the light collector fixation screws may fall off.
Stop opening the light collector fixation screws when they reach their upper position:.
CAUTION:
The "Gearbox with Motor and Scan Rollers" is a very sensitive module.
• Handle the module very carefully.
• Take care not to damage the surface of the scan rollers.

Repair and Service
3.6 Electrical Check after Power Supply Replacement
WARNING:
Improper ground connection of the digitizer metal housing may lead
to electric shocks.
• After any work at the power supply or at any component connected to mains
voltage inform the operator about the necessity of the electrical check according
to national regulations.
• If specific national regulations do not exist it is recommend to perform the
electrical check according to IEC 62353.
The electrical check is split up in two steps:
Step Task Section

1 Perform basic protective earth test. 3.6.1
2 Perform electrical check according to 3.6.2
National Regulations.
3.6.1 Basic Protective Earth Test
(1) Use a multimeter that is capable to measure a resistance < 1 Ohm.
(2) Measure the resistance of the

multimeter configuration, i.e. select
smallest range of “resistance
measurement” and measure the
resistance of your probes.
(the resulting resistance can be
added to the values allowed during
the measurements acc. to figure 7
and 8)
(3) Disconnected the power cable
at the wall side and at the device.
Figure 6

Repair and Service
Basic protective earth test without power cord
(1) Put one probe at the ground

connector of the mains input.
(2) Put the other probe at a few
metallic parts, the customer could
touch. The electrical resistance
has to be ≤ 0.2 Ohm. Refer to
Figure 7.
Figure 7
Basic protective earth test with power cord
(1) Insert the power cord at the

digitizer side; leave it disconnected
at the wall side.
(2) Put one probe at the ground
connector of the mains connector.
(3) Put the other probe at a few
metallic parts, the customer could
touch. The electrical resistance in
this case has to be ≤ 0.3 Ohm.
Refer to Figure 8.
Figure 8
IMPORTANT:
In case the electrical resistance of one measurement exceeds the limits (0.2 Ohm
without mains cable; 0.3 Ohm with mains cable) check the digitizer for loose grounding
connections!

Repair and Service
3.6.2 Electrical Check according to National Regulations
(1) Perform the electrical check according to National Regulations.
IMPORTANT:
It is recommended performing an electrical check according to IEC 62353.
According to National Regulations a partial acceptance is necessary.

Chapter 3.2
Imaging Services
Tools and auxiliary Means
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
CR 30-Xm
Type 5179 / 100
This document describes all tools (software, hardware), which are required for
servicing of the digitizer.

Document Title
DD+DIS230.10E CR 30-Xm / CR 30-X 2nd Service Manual,
Chapter 2 - Functional Description
Chapter 3.6 - Adjustments and Calibrations

eq_03-2_tools-aux_e_template_v08
Repair and Service
DD+DIS230.10E Tools and auxiliary Means
► Manufacturer
Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany
or its affiliates.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
IMPORTANT:
such services.
NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 1 CR 30-X 2nd Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225 Chapter 3.2 / Page 2 of 37
02-2012 CR 30-Xm Type 5179 / 100 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 MACHINE SPECIFIC TOOLS ..................................................................................................5

1.1 Required Tools..........................................................................................................................5
1.2 Recommended Tools................................................................................................................6
2 DIGITIZER SERVICE USER INTERFACE...............................................................................7

2.1.1 Service User Interface Menus...................................................................................................9
2.2 General Info ............................................................................................................................10
2.2.1 Device Info ..............................................................................................................................10
2.2.2 Network Info ............................................................................................................................11
2.2.3 E-Labels ..................................................................................................................................12
2.3 Reporting.................................................................................................................................13
2.3.1 Info Counter ............................................................................................................................13
2.3.2 Error Statistics.........................................................................................................................15
2.3.3 Service Activity Log.................................................................................................................16
2.3.4 HOT Report.............................................................................................................................17
2.4 Install & Configure...................................................................................................................18
2.4.1 Software Installation................................................................................................................18
2.4.2 Digitizer Settings .....................................................................................................................19
2.4.3 Destination Settings ................................................................................................................19
2.4.4 Site Specific Data....................................................................................................................20
2.4.5 Switch On/Off HV on PMM .....................................................................................................21
2.4.6 Installation Wizard...................................................................................................................21
2.4.7 Error Viewer Installation..........................................................................................................22
2.4.8 Log Settings ............................................................................................................................22
2.4.9 Protection Mechanism ............................................................................................................23
2.5 Diagnose & Repair ..................................................................................................................24
2.5.1 Explain Error Code..................................................................................................................24
2.5.2 Device Test .............................................................................................................................24
2.5.3 Diagnose Cycle .......................................................................................................................25

Repair and Service
2.5.4 Endurance Run Cycle .............................................................................................................27
2.5.5 Clear Relative Counters..........................................................................................................29
2.5.6 Prepare CAL. Board Replacement .........................................................................................29
2.5.7 Calibrate Cassette Opener Sensor .........................................................................................30
2.6 Maintain & Calibrate................................................................................................................31
2.6.1 Maintenance Indicator.............................................................................................................31
2.6.2 Stall Calibration .......................................................................................................................32
2.6.3 Shading Calibration.................................................................................................................33
2.7 Backup & Restore ...................................................................................................................34
2.7.1 Backup ....................................................................................................................................34
2.7.2 Restore....................................................................................................................................35
3 REMOTE DESKTOP ..............................................................................................................36

Repair and Service
1 Machine specific Tools
The listing of machine specific tools is divided in required tools and

recommended tools:
 Required tools: They are required for installation, repair or troubleshooting
 Recommended tools: They may facilitate installation, repair or troubleshooting
1.1 Required Tools
Following required tools are part of digitizer delivery:
 TX 10 (for the replacement of the chip reader)

 TX 20 (for the replacement of the most parts of the
digitizer)
 TX 30 (for the replacement of optic module)
 TX 45 (for the replacement of the scan unit)
Following required tools are not part of digitizer delivery:
Lint free cloth

Commercially available, Acquire locally
Flash light
Cutter
Multimeter (Ohmmeter)
200

Repair and Service
1.2 Recommended Tools
Tool Part Number* Purpose

Service key CM+9 0426 6309 0 To override the safety
switch.
Network Cable Commercially available, Transfer data between the
Acquire locally digitizer and the Service PC
in case that web interface is
used.
Copper Filter 1.5 mm CM+9 5155 1015 2 Exposure of test images:
Part of delivery of the
CR 30-Xm / CR 30-X 2nd
AL Filter 2.0 mm CM+9 5148 1090 0 Exposure of test images:
Part of delivery of the
CR 30-Xm / CR 30-X 2nd
Limit Pattern CD ROM CM+9 5175 9160 0 Limit pattern:
CR 30-X 2nd Part of delivery of the
CR 30-X 2nd
Limit Pattern CD ROM CM+604948 00 Limit pattern:
CR 30-Xm Part of delivery of the
CR 30-Xm
USB Flash Drive with CM+6037431 Transfer data between the
Digitizer Software Service PC and digitizer.
CIR_XXXX for Part of delivery of the
CR 30-X 2nd CR 30-X 2nd
(checked to be virus-free)
USB Flash Drive with CM+6045180 Transfer data between the
Digitizer Software Service PC and digitizer.
CIRMXXXX for CR 30-Xm Part of delivery of the CR
(checked to be virus-free) 30-Xm
Anti-static wrist strap CM+9 9999 0830 0 To avoid static discharges
on electronic components.
CR Phosphor Plate 10+9 9999 1197 0 To clean the Image Plates.
Cleaner (2 bottles)
Prosat wipes 10+9 9999 1219 0 To clean the Mammography
Image Plates.
Vacuum Cleaner Commercially available or To clean the digitizer during
(220 / 240V, 50 – 60 Hz) CM+9 9999 0895 0 maintenance.
Isoflex Topas NB52 (50 ml) CM+9 9999 9247 0 To grease the spindle in
the area of the spindle nut.

Repair and Service
Dirt bags for vacuum CM+9 9999 0896 0 To clean the digitizer during
cleaner (10 x) maintenance. Fits to
Vacuum Cleaner
CM+9 9999 0895 0
Lint free cloth Commercially available, To clean the Image Plates.
Acquire locally
Magnifying glass 8x CM+9 9579 9904 0 To check image quality of
films at the lightbox.
Service PC Commercially available To copy the digitizer
software from the PC
to the USB Flash Drive.
To get an explanation about
error codes "offline".
2 Digitizer Service User Interface
NOTE:
Depending on the digitizer type, following software is installed.
 CR 30-Xm Type 5179 / 100:
CIRM1XXX*
 CR 30-X 2nd Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225:
CIR_1XXX*
The screenshots in this document are taken from the CR-30Xm software version
CIRM1102.
*XXX = Version number of the software

Repair and Service
The “Service User Interface” provides access to the service software for the digitizer.
It requires:
 A network connection between PC and digitizer
 A Browser e.g. Internet Explorer or Mozilla Firefox
Proceeding to access the Service User Interface:

(1) Enter the digitizer IP address (e.g. 192.168.192.12) in the browser
address window.
(2) Enter username and password, which is provided during the class room training.
Proceeding to quit the Service User Interface:

(1) Select: <Logout>
(2) Follow the Logout wizard.
(3) Close the browser window.
Figure 1:
CR30-Xm / CR30-X 2nd Service User Interface

Repair and Service
2.1.1 Service User Interface Menus
Following menus are available in the digitizer service user interface:
Menu See Section

General Info
Device Info 2.2.1
Network Info 2.2.2
E-Labels 2.2.3
Reporting
Info Counter 2.3.1
Error Statistics 2.3.2
Service Activity Log 2.3.2
HOT Report 2.3.4
Install & Configure
Software Installation 2.4.1
Digitizer Settings 2.4.2
Destination Settings 2.4.3
Site Specific Date 2.4.4
Switch on/off HV on PMM 2.4.5
Installation Wizard 2.4.6
Error Viewer Installation 2.4.7
Log Settings 2.4.8
Protection Mechanism 2.4.9
Diagnose & Repair
Explain Error Code 2.5.1
Device Test 2.5.2
Diagnose Cycle 2.5.3
Endurance Run Cycle 2.5.4
Clear Relative Counters 2.5.5
Prepare CAL. Board Replacement 2.5.6
Calibrate Cassette Opener Sensor 2.5.7
Maintain & Calibrate
Maintenance Indicator 2.6.1
Stall Calibration 2.6.2
Shading Calibration 2.6.3
Backup / Restore
Backup 2.7.1
Restore 2.7.2

Repair and Service
2.2 General Info

2.2.1 Device Info
Purpose Show the device specific data configured in production.
Usage (1) Select: <General Info  Device Info>

Device specific data will be displayed.
NOTE:
The Device specific Data are “read-only” and just for identification
of the device.
Figure 2

Repair and Service
2.2.2 Network Info
Purpose Show the network settings of the digitizer and the hospital network with
connected devices.
Usage (1) Select: <General Info  Network Info>

Network Info will be displayed.
(2) Select <Ping Destination> to check the network connection to other devices
in the network.
NOTE:
Only this destination can be selected, which has been set-up in the
“Digitizer Settings” window.
The ping test tries to send data to the selected destination in the network
to verify an established connection.
Figure 3

Repair and Service
2.2.3 E-Labels
Purpose The “E-labels” keep information about module specific data like:
 Module serial number
 Last error codes
 Module specific parameters
Usage (1) Select: <General Info  E-Labels>

(2) Select the desired E-Label to view the contents.
Figure 4

Repair and Service
2.3 Reporting
2.3.1 Info Counter
Purpose The Info Counter provides device specific information on following items:
Main Info Counter Section Info Counter Details

Site and System Info  Device info
 Site info
 Hardware info
 Software info
 Configuration info
 Network info
 License info
Device Statistics  Machine running time
 Throughput
Service Statistics  Repair History
 Maintenance History
 HW Modification History
 SW Modification History
 Calibration History
Technical Counters  Cassette / IP Scan Statistics
 Test Cycles
 Component reliability
Failure Statistics  Last Counter Resets
 Start-ups and Resets
 Retries
 Incorrect User Handling
 Cassette Jams
 Image Plate Jams
 Error History
 Error List (sorted by relative)
 Error List (sorted by total)
 Warning List (sorted by relative)
 Warning List (sorted by total)

Repair and Service
Usage (1) Select: <Reporting  Info Counter>
Figure 5

Repair and Service
2.3.2 Error Statistics
Purpose The menu “Error Statistics” shows the frequency for all occurred errors.
It is used for troubleshooting.
Usage (1) Select: <Reporting  Error Statistics>
NOTE:
For the explanation of the error codes use the module “Explain Error
Code”. For more information refer to section 2.5.1.
Figure 6

Repair and Service
2.3.3 Service Activity Log
Purpose The menu Service Activity Log shows a logfile of all actions carried out by the
service staff.
Usage (1) Select: <Reporting  Service Activity Log>
Figure 7
NOTE:
All “ServiceActivity.log” files are part of a backup.
When the logfile exceeds 1 MB, a new and empty ServiceActivity.log file
is created.

Repair and Service
2.3.4 HOT Report
Purpose The menu “Hot Report” (Hand-over Test Report) gives a summary of the last
scan cycle.
The most important events that happened in the digitizer during this cycle are reported
here. When the HOT is performed successfully, the technical installation
(communication and image transmission) is basically working.
It is overwritten with each new scan cycle. Typically it stops with the last successful
action performed, hence it can be used for troubleshooting as well.
Usage (1) Select: <Reporting  Hot Report>
Figure 8

Repair and Service
2.4 Install & Configure
2.4.1 Software Installation
Purpose The menu “Software Installation” allows to upload and install software for the digitizer.
IMPORTANT:
For software installation a USB flash drive (checked to be virus-free) or network
connection is required.
For software installation via USB flash drive: One USB Flash Drive is scope of delivery
of the digitizer. The USB port of the digitizer does not accept all types of USB flash
drive.
Recommendation: Use the USB Flash drive delivered with the digitizer.
The USB Flash drive can also be ordered via spare part numbers*:
CM+6045180 (CR 30-Xm) or CM+6037431(CR 30-X 2nd)
Usage (1) Select: <Install & Configure  Software Installation>

(2) Follow the instructions which are enclosed to the software on the
Agfa HealthCare Library.
Figure 9

Repair and Service
2.4.2 Digitizer Settings
Purpose The menu “Digitizer Settings” allows entering data to modify the digitizer network
settings.
Usage The configuration of the digitizer settings is described in CR 30-Xm / CR 30-X 2nd
Service Manual, chapter 1, Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures.
(1) Select: < Install & Configure  Digitizer Settings>

Digitizer settings of the digitizer will be shown.
Figure 10
2.4.3 Destination Settings
The menu “Destination Settings” is not implemented yet.

Repair and Service
2.4.4 Site Specific Data
Purpose The menu “Site Specific Data” allows entering the site specific data for exact
identification of the digitizer. The data are part of the Info counter and the E-labels.
Usage (1) Select: < Install & Configure  Site Specific Data>
(2) Enter the required data.
(3) Click: <OK>
Figure 11

Repair and Service
2.4.5 Switch On/Off HV on PMM
Purpose The menu “Switch on/off HV (high voltage) on PMM” allows using the device with
open covers. This is necessary for troubleshooting to find possible problems during
scan cycle.
Usage (1) Select: < Install & Configure  PMT High Voltage on/off>
(2) Select <Switch high tension OFF>
to switch the HV off.
IMPORTANT:
Always switch the HV on after investigation.
Figure 12
NOTE:
By a reset of the digitizer (switch off / on) the HV for the PMM board will always
be switched on again.
2.4.6 Installation Wizard
The menu “Installation Wizard” is not implemented yet.

Repair and Service
2.4.7 Error Viewer Installation
Purpose The menu “Error Viewer Installation” allows to install the error viewer at the operating
system.
Usage (1) Select: <Install & Configure  Error Viewer Installation>
Figure 13
2.4.8 Log Settings
Purpose The menu “Log Settings” allows to configure the Log Level.
Usage (1) Select: <Install & Configure  Log Settings>
Figure 14

Repair and Service
2.4.9 Protection Mechanism
Purpose The menu “Protection Mechanism” allows enabling or disabling the protecting
mechanism to access the service menu. By default the protection mechanism is
disabled.
Usage (1) Select: < Install & Configure  Protection Mechanism>

(2) Enter access code and license code.
IMPORTANT:
When the protection mechanism is not enabled, the service menu
is only protected through standard service password from Agfa.
Figure 15
NOTE:
Obtain the access code and license code for the individual device from the Local
Agfa Service Organization:
 Access code and license code have an expiration date configured by the
Local Agfa Service Organization.
 Once the protection mechanism is activated, enter access code and the code
only (not for the license code any more).
 When entered the service menu, you will not be asked for login to the service
menu for the next 16 hours.
 If the expiration date is reached, login with the access code one more time only
and get access for the next 16 hours. After that time the device will block itself
asking for new access and license code.
IMPORTANT:
De-activate “remember passwords” in the browser otherwise the service menu will be
accessible by everyone who uses the service user interface.
Repair and Service
2.5 Diagnose & Repair
2.5.1 Explain Error Code
Purpose The menu “Explain Error Code” list the description for the digitizer error codes which
are reported by the error viewer.
Usage (1) Select: <Diagnose & Repair  Explain error code>

(2) Enter the error code and click button: <Get Error Description>
The error description is displayed.
Figure 16
2.5.2 Device Test
Purpose The menu “Selftest of Device” allows a reboot of the digitizer via CR 30-Xm / CR 30-X
2nd service user interface. The functional sequence of the selftest is identical to the
selftest during switch-on.
For more information refer to CR 30-Xm / CR 30-X 2nd Service Manual, chapter 2,
Functional Description.
Usage (1) Select: <Diagnose & Repair  Device Test>

(2) Click: <Start SELFTEST>
(3) Wait till the digitizer has rebooted. This takes approximately 1 minute.
Figure 17

Repair and Service
2.5.3 Diagnose Cycle
Purpose The menu “Diagnose Cycle” allows to perform a complete scan cycle manually
step by step e.g. for troubleshooting purpose.
Usage Diagnose Cycle of the complete device:
(1) Select: <Diagnose & Repair  Diagnose Cycle>

(2) Click: <Confirm>
The diagnose cycle window is shown.
(3) Put a cassette into the digitizer.
(4) Press the blue marked buttons to perform the required actions.
See also explanation on next page.
Figure 18

Repair and Service
IMPORTANT:
 The Error Viewer and related confirm / cancel window only pops up at the
NX workstation. This means, that in any case entering the diagnose cycle
window needs to be confirmed at the NX workstation.
 Only leave the Diagnose Cycle window by the CANCEL button. Leaving it via
browser back button requires a reboot of the digitizer to allow further service
activities.
Figure 19
NOTE:
Description of the colored rectangles shown in the diagnose cycle overview:
 A light blue displayed rectangle shows other statuses of the complete
cassette cycle.
 A green displayed rectangle shows the current status.
 A dark blue displayed rectangle shows the currently possible action.
 A gray displayed rectangle shows the next possible action.

Repair and Service
2.5.4 Endurance Run Cycle
Purpose The menu “Endurance Run Cycle” allows to run up to 300 cassette cycles with or
without scanning and erasure:
This can be helpful when investigating sporadic image plate handling failures.
Usage (1) Select: <Diagnose & Repair  Endurance Run Cycle>

(2) Click: <Confirm>
The endurance run window is shown.
Figure 20

Repair and Service
(3) Put a cassette into the digitizer.

(4) Select the number of cycles and delay between cycles (if required).
(5) Select <Scanning> and / or <Erasure> (if required).
(6) Select: <Start>
Figure 21
IMPORTANT:
 The Error Viewer and related confirm / cancel window only pops up at the
NX workstation. This means, that in any case, entering the Endurance Run
window needs to be confirmed at the NX workstation.
 Only leave the Endurance Run window by the CANCEL button. Leaving it via
browser back button requires a reboot of the digitizer to allow further service
activities.

Repair and Service
2.5.5 Clear Relative Counters
Purpose With the menu “Clear Relative Counters” the relative counters* of the info counter
are cleared.
* Number of test cycles per format; number of start-ups and resets; Retries; Incorrect User Handling;
Cassette and IP jams; Error List; Warning List
Usage (1) Select: <Diagnose & Repair  Clear Relative Counters>

(2) Click: <OK>
Figure 22
2.5.6 Prepare CAL. Board Replacement
Purpose With the menu “Prepare Calibration Board Replacement” the Roller lift drive is moved
in a dedicated position to dismantle the Calibration board.
Usage (1) Select: <Diagnose & Repair  Prepare CAL. Board replacement>
(2) Click: <Start>
Figure 23

Repair and Service
2.5.7 Calibrate Cassette Opener Sensor
Purpose Determines the number of steps between "close" and "open" position of the cassette
opener. For more information refer to chapter 3.6, Adjustments and Calibrations.
Usage (1) Select: <Diagnose & Repair  Calibrate Cass. Opener Sensor>
(2) Click: <Start>
Figure 24

Repair and Service
2.6 Maintain & Calibrate

2.6.1 Maintenance Indicator
Purpose The menu “Maintenance Indicator” allows:

 To reset relative counters after performed maintenance
 To activate or deactivate the maintenance notification mechanism.
By default the maintenance notification is disabled.
 To change the target values for the Mean Cycle Between Maintenance (MCBM)
and the Mean Time Between Maintenance (MTBM)
 To configure whether the screen "Preventive Maintenance required" shall
pop-up in the user interface of the NX workstation if the maintenance due date
(based on operating hours or cycles) is expired.
Usage (1) Select: <Maintain & Calibrate  Maintenance Indicator>

(2) Select <Reset Maintenance Counter> to reset the time/cycle counter.
(3) Choose <Yes> in the pull-down menu <Display Maintenance Reminder>
to configure and enable the maintenance reminder.
 "Yes" means: The customer will be reminded with "Preventive Maintenance

required" message daily.
 "No" means: No display is shown to the customer.
Figure 25: Maintenance Indicator set to “No”
(4) If the Maintenance Indicator is activated: Configure the number of target

operating hours and Cycles.
(5) Click: <OK>
Figure 26: Maintenance Indicator set to “Yes”

Repair and Service
2.6.2 Stall Calibration
Purpose The menu “Stall Calibration” allows performing a stall calibration for a single motor
or for all motors.
Usage The stall calibration procedure is described in CR 30-Xm / CR 30-X 2nd Service
Manual, chapter 3.6, Adjustments and Calibrations.
Be aware, that entering the Stall Calibration window needs to be confirmed in the
error viewer.
Figure 27
IMPORTANT:
The Error Viewer and related confirm / cancel window only pops up at the
NX workstation. This means, that in any case, entering the Stall Calibration window
needs to be confirmed at the NX workstation.

Repair and Service
2.6.3 Shading Calibration
Purpose The menu “Shading Calibration” provides functionality to compensate image

inhomogeneities caused by certain properties of the scanning system of the digitizer.
Usage The shading calibration procedure is described in CR 30-Xm / CR 30-X 2nd Service
Manual, chapter 3.6, Adjustments and Calibrations.
Figure 28: Screenshot from CR 30-Xm
Figure 29: Screenshot from CR 30-X 2nd

Repair and Service
2.7 Backup & Restore
2.7.1 Backup
Purpose The menu “Backup” allows storing device specific settings and other relevant data
(e.g. info counter, logfiles etc.) in a backup Zip file (= Backup).
NOTE:
The device specific data of the digitizer are stored in a database in the CF-card of the
digitizer and in the E-labels of the digitizer.
The internal backup will be executed by the digitizer automatically upon changing
digitizer specific data. This initiates a notification to store the backup manually on
a storage medium.
(1) Select: <Backup & Restore  Backup>
Figure 30
Usage Perform the following steps to create a complete external backup:

Complete
backup (1) Choose option: <Complete Backup>
(2) Insert USB Flash Drive into digitizer.
(3) Click <Save to USB> to perform the complete backup.
(4) Wait until the read/write activity LED at the USB Flash Drive is off for a few
seconds.

Repair and Service
Usage Perform the following steps to create a backup of single files:

Backup of
single files (1) Choose option: <Backup Single Files Only>
(2) Select the required files:
 Info counter and/or
 Calibration Files and/or
 Logfiles and/or HOT report and/or
 Service Activity Log
(4) Select <Save to USB> to perform the backup.
seconds.
2.7.2 Restore
Purpose The menu “Restore” is required in case the CF-card has been replaced by
a new one.
If the Backup is not restored, the digitizer specific data on the E-lables will be copied
onto the CF-card after next reboot. This ensures functionality of the device,
but the device history records (e.g. infocounter) will be lost.
Usage (1) Select: <Backup & Restore  Restore>

(3) Click: <Restore from USB>
seconds.
NOTE:
It is only possible to restore the backup that was created on this device.
Figure 31

Repair and Service
3 Remote Desktop
Purpose Remote connection to the digitizer means:

Connection via a PC in the local network or via internet.
To prevent that service actions initiated via service user interface interfere with the
operation by the customer, two safety levels are built in the software:
 Level 1: When executing the function (e.g. software installation), the digitizer status
indicator changes to red constant. The user cannot scan an image.
Note, that the status indicator only changes to red, when the function is really
executed (e.g. the user presses OK). Just by opening the menu, the safety level 1
is not yet activated.
 Level 2: The user has to confirm in the error viewer (installed on the NX
workstation), that the function can be executed.
The table below shows the safety level per service menu:
Service Menu Name Reference Level 1: Level 2:

Scanning blocked Confirmation
required
Device Info 2.2.1 No No
Network Info 2.2.2 No No
E-Labels 2.2.3 No No
Info Counter 2.3.1 No No
Error Statistics 2.3.2 No No
Service Activity Log 2.3.3 No No
HOT Report 2.3.4 No No
Software Installation 2.4.1 Yes No
Digitizer Settings 2.4.2 Yes No
Destination Settings 2.4.3 Yes No
Site Specific Data 2.4.4 No No
PMT High Voltage on/off 2.4.5 Yes No
Installation Wizard 2.4.6 Yes No
Error Viewer Installation 2.4.7 No No
Log Settings 2.4.8 No No
Protection Mechanism 2.4.9 No No
Explain Error Code 2.5.1 No No

Repair and Service
Service Menu Name Reference Level 1: Level 2:

Scanning blocked Confirmation
required
Device Test 2.5.2 Yes No
Diagnose Cycle 2.5.3 Yes Yes
Endurance Run Cycle 2.5.4 Yes yes
Clear Relative Counter 2.5.5 No No
Prepare CAL. Board 2.5.6 Yes Yes
replacement
Calibrate Cassette Opener 2.5.7 Yes No
Sensor
Maintenance Indicator 2.6.1 No No
Stall Calibration 2.6.2 Yes yes
Shading Calibration 2.6.3 Yes yes
Backup 2.7.1 No No
Restore 2.7.2 Yes No

Chapter 3.3
Imaging Services
Troubleshooting
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
CR 30-Xm
Type 5179 / 100
This document provides troubleshooting information.

Revision Date
Compared to previous version 1.1
1.2 02-2012  Added switch-on sequence as possible cause for
communication problem. See section 4.
 Added evaluation of Mammography limit pattern.
See section 6.
Document Title
Referenced documents are listed in the respective sections.

The controlled version of this document resides on the Agfa HealthCare Library. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.
troubleshooting_chapter_e_template_v01
Repair and Service
DD+DIS230.10E Troubleshooting
► Manufacturer
Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany
or its affiliates.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the product.
IMPORTANT:
such services.
NOTE:
‘Order List, Checklist for Completeness’ in the Agfa HealthCare Library.

Edition 1, Revision 2 CR 30-X 2nd, Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225 Chapter 3.3 / 2 of 2
Repair and Service
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 GENERAL SYMPTOM CLASSIFICATION...............................................................................4

2 FAULTS WITH ERROR CODES ..............................................................................................5
3 NO ERROR CODE - STATUS LED DOES NOT TURN GREEN - NO MOTOR AUDIBLE......6
4 NO ERROR CODE - STATUS LED DOES NOT TURN GREEN - MOTOR AUDIBLE ............9
5 IMAGE FAULTS .....................................................................................................................12
5.1 Calibration Lines .....................................................................................................................12
5.2 Banding ...................................................................................................................................13
5.3 Dust Stripes.............................................................................................................................14
5.4 White Dots (Mammography images only)...............................................................................15
6 USING THE LIMIT PATTERN TO JUDGE IMAGE FLAWS ...................................................16

6.1 Preparation..............................................................................................................................16
6.2 Comparing the Flatfield with the Test Pattern "Lowest Acceptable Quality" ..........................16
6.2.1 Importing the Limit Pattern......................................................................................................16
6.3 Comparing Limit Pattern with Flat Field..................................................................................17

Repair and Service
1 General Symptom Classification
The troubleshooting procedure depends on the symptom of the fault:
Symptom Reference Section

An error is displayed in the error viewer 2
No error displayed: 3
 Status LED does not turn green
 No motor audible during boot-up
No error displayed: 4
 Status LED does not turn green
 Motors audible during boot-up
Image artifacts 5

Repair and Service
2 Faults with Error Codes
Symptom The digitizer error viewer on the NX workstation displays an error code,
e.g. CIR214 (4170).
NOTE:
Meaning of the error codes CIRXXX (YYYYY):
 The error code CIRXXX is the service message number.
 The error code (YYYYY) is the R&D internal error code.
Cause The digitizer software detected a malfunction of the digitizer.
Solution Solve the problem as described in the service description of the error code.
To look-up a digitizer error code (e.g. CIR214) proceed as follows:
A) Look-up the error "online" (Access to NX Workstation available):

(1) On the NX Workstation start the internet browser.
(2) Enter the IP address of the digitizer in the address window.
(3) Look-up the error in menu "Explain Error Code".
B) Look-up the error "offline" (No access to NX Workstation):

(1) Download the latest CR 30-X 2nd Software File from the
(2) Unzip the CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm Software File.
(3) Unzip the CIR_XXXX.zip or CIRMXXXX* file.
(4) Using Excel, look-up the error in file "errors.csv".
* XXXX represents the software version.
CIR_XXXX (e.g. CIR_1203) is the software for CR 30-X 2nd
CIRMXXXX (e.g. CIRM1102) is the software for CR 30-Xm
NOTE:
The R&D internal error codes YYYYY can also be looked up in menu "Explain Error
Code" or the file "errors.csv". The error descriptions are however not prepared for the
service user.

Repair and Service
3 No Error Code - Status LED does not turn green - No Motor

audible
Symptom After boot-up the Status LED does not turn green.
The NX workstation is running, however no error is displayed in the error viewer.
NOTE:
For a default boot-up sequence refer to the digitizer service manual chapter 2,
Functional Description.
Cause 1 Power supply defective.
Solution 1 Check whether the 24 V output is available at the power supply. If 24 V output is not
available: Exchange the power supply.
Cause 2 CF Card defective.
Solution 2 Step 1: Confirm that the CF card is defective as follows:

(1) On the NX workstation enter the IP address of the digitizer in the browser
address window.
(2) Evaluate as follows:
 If the login appears, the CF card is OK.
 If following text is displayed: "Contents of ram:///" accessing the
CF card is not possible.
Step 2: Check whether the CF card is inserted properly.

Step 3: Final confirmation that CF card is defective:
(1) Insert the CF card in an external CF card reader.
(2) Access the CF card via the Windows Explorer.
(3) Evaluate as follows:
 If the CF card is not recognized by the Windows operating system, this is
the confirmation that it is defective.
 If the content of the C: partition is displayed, the CF card is OK. In this
case replace the PMI board. See als NOTE below.

Repair and Service
NOTE:
When viewing the contents of the digitizer CF card in the Windows Explorer only the
C: partition is visible. The partitions D: and E: are not displayed.
Cause 3 Missing power for PMI board or PMI board defective.
Solution 3 Check the status of the LEDs on the PMI board. See service manual chapter 3.4 for a
description about the LED default status.
The table below lists the possible solutions by PMI board LEDs:
# PMI Board LED Status Measure to solve the Problem

1 LD9#17 (3.3VD) does not light up,
LD16 (red "watch dog" LED) is on
(permanent or blinking)
LD12 (red FPGA LED) is on
(permanent)
LD16 (red "watch dog" LED) is on
Replace PMI Power Distribution Board
LD5#12 (2.5VD) does not light up,
LD4#2 (1.5V_MOD) does not light up,
LD5#2 (1.5V_PL) does not light up,
LD3#2 (2.5V_SDRAM) does not light
up, LD16 (red "watch dog" LED) ) is
on (permanent or blinking)
5 LD7#17 (24V_POL) does not light up
6 LD1#5 (VCC_USB) does not light up
7 LD16 (red "watch dog" LED) is on Replace PMI board
8 P1#4 (ETH10/100) and LD1#4 If all measures described in section 4 are
(ETH_REC) do not light up (not already performed: Exchange PMI board.
permanent and not intermittently)

Repair and Service
Cause 4 In general: Selftest of digitizer hardware (boards, motors, sensors) is not successful.
Solution 4 Use the "Boot Problem Analyzer" to get more info about the problem.
Instructions:
(2) Take out the USB memory stick from the USB storage box.
(3) Insert the USB memory stick at the Service PC.
(4) Copy the content of folder “CIR_1102*/BootProblemAnalyzer” (*or higher
version) to the root of the USB memory Stick. See Figure 1.
USB Memory Stick Contents before
USB Memory Stick Contents after

preparation for the Boot Problem Analyzer
preparing_USB_for_boot_anaylzer.cdr
Figure 1
(5) Release the USB memory Stick from the Service PC and insert it at the digitizer.
(7) After approximately 1 minute remove the USB memory stick: The log files to
analyze the boot-up have been written to directory \log.
(8) Check the portex.properties.log file for wrong network settings.
If the network settings are OK, zip the logfiles and forward them to the next
support level.

Repair and Service
4 No Error Code - Status LED does not turn green - Motors

audible
Symptom Status LED is red blinking. More than one minute after switch on the status LED does
not change to green.
Motors have been audible during the boot-up procedure.
No error message in the error viewer. "Digitizer start-up" message is not shown
approximately 40 seconds after switch on.
Cause 1 Network cable connected directly between digitizer and workstation and NX
workstation software is NX 2.0.8500/3.0.8500 or NX 2.0.8600/3.0.8600.
Solution 1 Possibility 1: Use a network switch to connect digitizer to the NX workstation.

Possibility 2: Observe switch on sequence for the setup mentioned under "cause 1":
First switch on the digitizer, then switch on the NX workstation.
As alternative: With digitizer switched on select at NX workstation:
START > All Programs > Agfa > NX > Restart NX completely
Possibility 3: Configure digitizer and NX workstation for the local network and connect
both to the local network.
Cause 2 Network cable not connected or defective.
Solution 2  Check network interface LEDs at NX workstation: They should light up (constant or
intermittently).
 Check the orange LED LD1#4 at the PMI board (see chapter 3.4 of the Service
Manual): It should light up.
If the network LEDs on both sides do not light up, try another network cable.
Cause 3 Network interface defective at NX Workstation or digitizer.

Repair and Service
Solution 3 Checking the network interface at the NX workstation:

(1) Connect the Service PC via network cable to the NX workstation (Service PC
IP address configuration not required).
(2) Check whether the network LEDs at the NX workstation light up.
If the network LEDs on the NX workstation does not light up, exchange the network
interface at the NX workstation.
Checking the network interface at the digitizer:

(3) Connect the Service PC via network cable to the digitizer PMI board (Service PC
IP address configuration not required).
(4) Check the orange LED LD1#4 at the PMI board (see chapter 3.4 of the Service
Manual): It should light up.
If the network LED on the digitizer does not light up, exchange the PMI board.
Cause 4 Wrong configuration settings on digitizer and/or NX Workstation.
Solution 4 Following settings must be correct on the digitizer and the NX Workstation to allow
communication (see table below):
# Digitizer Setting Setting on NX (correspondent parameter)

1 Destination IP Address NX Workstation IP address (Windows setting)
2 Destination Name NX Workstation “Processing Station Name”
(Configuration Tool menu "General Configuration 
Configure Workstation settings  General Settings")
3 AE title (Image) NX Workstation “Performed Station AE Title”
(Configuration Tool menu "General Configuration 
Configure Workstation settings  General Settings")
4 Digitizer IP Address IP address in digitizer device configuration. As
alternative also the digitizer host name can be used.
5 Digitizer AE title AE title in digitizer device configuration.
6 Digitizer Hostname Host Name in digitizer device configuration. As
alternative also the digitizer IP address can be used.
7 Digitizer Type “CR 30-X Has to be selected when adding a new digitizer with
Dicom” or "CR 30-Xm", the NX Configuration Tool. Is later on displayed as
depending on the “Type” in the Device Configuration Settings.
connected digitizer.

Repair and Service
Cause 5 Digitizer IP address or subnet mask configured wrong (e.g. due to a typing error):
Accessing the digitizer service pages is not possible anymore, as the network settings
are unknown.
Solution 5 Reset the IP address to default. Proceeding:

(2) Take out the USB memory stick from the USB storage box.
(3) Insert the USB memory stick at the Service PC.
(4) Go to folder “CIR_1013” (or higher version) on the USB Memory Stick.
(5) Double click on: <RestoreDefaultAddress.cmd>
 A Command Line Window opens for a short time.
 The file startup.com is written to the root of the USB memory stick.
(6) Release the USB Memory Stick from the Service PC and insert it at the digitizer.
(8) Wait until the boot-up is finished (approximately 1 minute).
(9) Remove the USB memory stick and put it back in the USB storage box.
After bootup of the digitizer the network settings are as follows:
IP Address: 192.192.192.192
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
Gateway IP Address: 192.192.192.1
Digitizer AE Title: DIG_DEFAULT
Digitizer Hostname: 192.192.192.192
NOTE:
After a reset of the network settings it is required to configure the network settings
again. Refer to Service Manual Chapter 1, "Controls, Connections, and Setup
Procedures".
Cause 6 NX Application is not running.
Solution 6 Check the NX Workstation Monitor in the task bar: It must be green.

Repair and Service
5 Image Faults
5.1 Calibration Lines
Symptom Calibration Lines are visible in the clinical image or a flatfield image.
Cause Calibration characteristics don’t match physical characteristics of detector path.
Solution (1) Use the cleaning brush to clean the mirror and the entrance surface of the light
collector by moving the brush a few times.
(2) Redo the shading calibration.
IMPORTANT:
On the NX Workstation the image is displayed in portrait mode (scanned in landscape,
viewed in portrait).
Example for Calibration Lines:

ROI (marked with rectangle, showing the typical limit pattern for calibration lines)
Figure 2: Calibration Lines in exaggerated view

Repair and Service
5.2 Banding
Symptom Banding stripes are visible in the clinical image or a flatfield image.
Cause Inhomogeneous slowscan movement
Solution (1) Check the table where digitizer is positioned. It must be a fixed position. No
vibrations may disturb the scanning.
(2) If unacceptable image flaws suntil occurs:
AGFA Employees: Contact the Regional Support Network (RSN).
Non AGFA Employees: Contact your local AGFA partner.
IMPORTANT:
Example for Banding:

ROI (marked with rectangle, showing the typical limit pattern for banding)
Figure 3: Banding in exaggerated view

Repair and Service
5.3 Dust Stripes
Symptom Dust stripes are visible in the clinical image or a flatfield image.
Cause Dust in the scan path
Solution (1) Use the cleaning brush to clean the mirror and the entrance surface of the light
collector by moving the brush a few times.
(2) Re-expose the flatfield and evaluate again.
AGFA employees: Contact the Regional Support Network (RSN).
External partners: Contact your local AGFA representative.
IMPORTANT:
Example for Dust stripes:

ROI (marked with rectangle, showing the typical appearance of dust stripes)
Figure 4: Dust stripes in exaggerated view

Repair and Service
5.4 White Dots (Mammography images only)
Symptom White dots visible
Cause Dirt on cassette or Image Plate.
Solution The white dots should not disturb diagnosis and do not influence diagnosis quality.
(1) Check with the radiologist if they are satisfied with the image quality.
(2) Clean the cassette and Image Plate.
Contact Regional Support Network (RSN). External partners: Contact your local
AGFA representative.
NOTE:
Acceptable image flaws means that the white dots shall be in sufficiently distance from
each other (> 1cm) and may not form clusters.
IMPORTANT:
Example for white dots (marked with rectangle, showing the typical appearance of
Mammography white dots):
Figure 5: Mammography white dots in exaggerated view

Repair and Service
6 Using the Limit Pattern to judge Image Flaws
The limit pattern CD ROM is part of digitizer delivery or available as spare part*.
 Version for CR 30-X 2nd: CM+9 5175 9160 0
 Version for CR 30-Xm: CM+604948 0
* The last digit in the spare part number indicates the spare part revision at release of
this document. When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.
The following sections 6.1 and 6.2 describe how to judge image flaws by using the
Limit Pattern.
6.1 Preparation
Prepare using the limit pattern as follows:

(1) Check the Image Plate before exposure.
(2) Erase the cassette.
(3) Create the Flatfield Test Image.
(4) Scan the Flatfield Image.
(5) Check the Image at the Lightbox or Viewing Station.
Refer to the digitizer Service Documentation, Chapter 1, "Controls, Connections, and
Setup Procedures" section “Checking the Technical Image Quality of the System” for
details.
6.2 Comparing the Flatfield with the Test Pattern "Lowest Acceptable Quality"
6.2.1 Importing the Limit Pattern
(1) Insert the limit pattern storage medium (part of digitizer delivery) into the NX
workstation CD ROM drive.
(2) On the NX workstation select the Main Menu.
(3) Select <import images>.

Repair and Service
(4) For CR 30-Xm Limit Pattern CD ROM:

Browse to following directory on the CD ROM to select the limit pattern:
- directory \Genrad for the Genrad limit pattern
- directory \Mammography for the Mammography limit pattern
For CR 30-X 2nd Limit Pattern CD ROM:

Browse to the root directory on the CD ROM to select the (Genrad) limit pattern.
(5) Wait until the image is imported (approx. 15 seconds).
(6) The imported image will be available in the worklist menu “closed exams” as:
 “Limit Pattern Genrad” or
 “Limit Pattern Mammography”
depending on which image has been imported.
(7) Select the Examination menu.
(8) Print the flatfield image or send it to the archive (depending on what is available).
NOTE:
 Windows/Level settings may not be changed.
 Default settings should be used for printing.
 The Softcopy Station must have the same quality and settings than the
hardcopy printout. Refer to the respective Softcopy Station Manual.
6.3 Comparing Limit Pattern with Flat Field
Compare the Limit Pattern with the flat field:

At the lightbox or the viewing station visually compare the flatfield with the limit pattern.
The limit pattern represents the lowest acceptable image quality.
Evaluation:
 If the scanned image visually looks as good as or better than the limit pattern, the
image quality is okay.
 If there are unacceptable effects see section 5 of this document.

Chapter 3.4
Imaging Services
Electrical and mechanical Codes, Fuses, LEDs
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
CR 30-Xm
Type 5179 / 100
This document describes the location and meaning of the Codes and LEDs
on the different Printed Circuit Boards (PCB) for repair activities.
It describes how to detect defective boards.

Document Title
Not applicable

eq_03-4_codings_e_template_v08
Repair and Service
DD+DIS230.10E Electrical and mechanical Codes, Fuses, LEDs
► Manufacturer
Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany
or its affiliates.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
IMPORTANT:
such services.
NOTE:

Repair and Service
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................4
2 HANDLING CONTROL BOARD...............................................................................................5
3 CPMI BOARD (PHOTO MULTIPLIER INTERFACE) ...............................................................7
4 STATUS INDICATOR ON THE USER INTERFACE BOARD ................................................11

Repair and Service
1 Introduction
This chapter describes the location and meaning of the switches and LEDs
of the following boards:
• Handling Control Board
• CPMI Board (Photo Multiplier Interface)
• User Interface Board
Following boards are not listed, as they have no switches and LEDs:
• CPMI Power Distribution Board
• Erasure LED Control Board
• Calibration Board
• PMM Board (Photo Multiplier Module)
It is recommended to use a coloured printout of this document to support the better

visual understanding of the boards.
NOTE:
This document displays the LEDs and switches only. Fuses are not displayed.
IMPORTANT:
In case of an error check the LEDs on the CR 30-X 2nd boards.
Never replace any fuses in case of an error.

Repair and Service
2 Handling Control Board
NOTE:
The following Figure 1 shows the Handling Control Board and the position of the
switches and LEDs of CR 30-X 2nd. It is also valid for CR 30-Xm. For detailed
differences of the Handling Control Board of CR 30-X 2nd and CR 30-Xm refer to:
CR 30-Xm / CR 30-X 2nd Service Manual Chapter 4 "Reference and Circuit Diagrams"
ON
1 2
Figure 1 - CR 30-X 2nd Handling Control Board
Meaning
S1/1 Not used.
S1/2 Not used.
S3 Board reset. Only for R&D purpose.

Repair and Service
The following table shows the conditions indicated by the LEDs.
LED Status Indicator Meaning

LD1 Red Constant ON* +5 V Logic Supply present
OFF +5 V Logic Supply not present

LD2 Red Constant ON +5 V Logic Supply not present, or
Application Software download
in progress, or
Application Software not running
/ hangup, or
RESET button S3 is pressed
OFF* Application Software, services watchdog

present
LD3 Red Flashing ON* Live LED (SW controlled) flashing with
2 Hz shows “Firmware alive”
OFF Firmware not running, or

RESET button S3 is pressed
* Default during operation

Repair and Service
3 CPMI Board (Photo Multiplier Interface)
NOTE:
The following Figure 2 shows the CPMI Board and the position of the switches
and LEDs.
Figure 2
Switch Meaning
S1#2 Reset of CPU
S1#12 Reset Hardware

Repair and Service
The following table shows the conditions indicated by the LEDs.

LD1#2 Orange Constant ON* Chip select (CS) off-board Flash active
OFF CS off-board Flash not active
LD1#3 Green Constant ON* CF card active.
OFF CF card not active.
LD1#4 Orange Constant ON* Connection via Ethernet
OFF Connection via Ethernet failed, Ethernet
Receive activity
LD1#5 Green Constant ON* VCC-USB supply voltage available
OFF VCC-USB supply voltage not available
LD1#17 Green Constant ON* +12 V / -12 V Optic Module supply
voltage available
OFF +12 V / -12 V Optic Module supply
voltage not available
LD1#19 Green Constant ON* +5 V PMT (Digital) supply
voltage available
OFF +5 V PMT (Digital) supply
LD2#2 Orange Constant ON* CS-on-board Flash active
OFF CS-on-board Flash not active
LD2#17 Green Constant ON* +12 V / -12 V Calibration Board supply
voltage available
OFF +12 V / -12 V Calibration Board supply
LD3#2 Green Constant ON* +2.5 V – SDRAM, CPU voltage available
OFF +2.5 V – SDRAM, CPU voltage not
available
LD3#17 Green Constant ON* + 20 V / -10V PMT (Analog) supply voltage
available
OFF + 20 V / -10V PMT (Analog) supply

Repair and Service

LD4#2 Green Constant ON* +1.5 V – Core, CPU voltage available
OFF +1.5 V – Core, CPU voltage not available
LD4#12 Green Constant ON* +1.5 V CPU supply voltage available
OFF +1.5 V CPU supply voltage not available,
LD16 (red) ON
LD4#17 Green Constant ON* +8 V PMI intern analog supply voltage
available
OFF +8 V PMI intern analog supply voltage not
available
LD5#2 Green Constant ON* +1.5 V – PLL, CPU voltage available
OFF +1.5 V – PLL, CPU voltage not available
LD5#12 Green Constant ON* +2.5 V CPU voltage available
OFF +2.5 V CPU voltage not available,
LD16 (red)
LD5#17 Green Constant ON* +12 V CAN bus line driver, supply voltage
available
OFF +12 V CAN bus line driver supply voltage
not available. No connection to Cassette
Handling Board.
LD7#17 Green Constant ON* +24 V (Polygon) supply voltage Power
Distribution Board and PMI Board
available
OFF +24 V (Polygon) supply voltage Power
Distribution Board and PMI Board not
available
LD8#17 Green Constant ON* +5,0 V PMI Board boot-up
OFF +5,0 V supply voltage (PMI intern) failed,
LD16 (red) ON
LD9#17 Green Constant ON* +3,3 V supply voltage, PMI Board boot-up
OFF +3,3 V supply voltage (PMI intern) failed,
LD16 (red) ON
LD10#17 Green Constant ON* +1,2 V supply voltage available
OFF +1,2 V supply voltage (FPGA,
PMI intern) failed, LD12 (red) ON

Repair and Service

LD12 Red Constant ON FPGA empty, not programmable
OFF* FPGA programmed
LD13 Orange Constant ON* SW LED0 (USB CAN) active
OFF SW LED0 (USB CAN) not active
LD14 Orange Constant ON* SW LED1 (CD/l²C/SPI) active
OFF SW LED1 (CD/l²C/SPI) not active
LD15 Orange Constant ON* SW LED2 (Timer 1/sec) active
OFF SW LED2 (Timer 1/sec) not active
LD16 (red) ON
LD16 Red Constant ON PMI self-test failed, Read/Write failure to
RAM, Board internal supply voltages not
present, SW LED3 (Fail/Java/Swap)
OFF* PMI self-test successful

Repair and Service
4 Status Indicator on the User Interface Board
NOTE:
The following Figure 3 shows the Status Indicator of the User Interface Board.
blue
green or
red
Figure 3
Status Indicator Digitizer Status Meaning

Blue Constant Activating the erasure cycle. ON if erasure cycle active.
Constant Stand-by mode (READY) ON if:
• Ready / Stand-by
Green • Cassette is ready for removal.

Flashing Busy with scanning and ON during scan cycle active.
transporting cassette and
image plate.
Red Constant Service mode
Flashing • Warm up / Self-test
Check NX workstation for
• Processing further information and detailed
instructions.
• Software down
• Error

Chapter 3.5
Imaging Services
Replacements / Repair Procedures
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
CR 30-Xm
Type 5179 / 100
This document describes the replacements of parts including verification method.

1.1 02-2012  Added step "Prepare Cal Board replacement" before
replacing calibration board.
 Added step to perform software installation in case of error
4230 at handling control board.
 Added replacement of cassette opener sensor.
Document Title
DD+DIS230.10E CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm, Chapter 3.6, Adjustments and
Calibrations

eq_03-5_replacements_e_template_v07
Repair and Service
DD+DIS230.10E Replacements / Repair Procedures
► Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 München
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the product.
CAUTION:
Static discharge! Electrical components may be destroyed:
For the repair on electrical components, wear a grounding strap
(Order number: CM+9 9999 0830 0) around the wrist and connect the other end of this
strap on a grounded conducting metal piece.
NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 1 CR 30-X 2nd, Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225 Chapter 3.5 / 2
Repair and Service
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 REPLACEMENTS AT THE BASE FRAME ..............................................................................5

1.1 Replacing the Front Cover ........................................................................................................5
1.2 Replacing the Left Cover ..........................................................................................................7
1.3 Replacing the Right Cover ......................................................................................................10
1.4 Replacing the Top Cover ........................................................................................................12
1.5 Replacing the User Interface Board........................................................................................14
1.6 Replacing the Safety Switch ...................................................................................................17
1.7 Replacing the Main Switch with Wire Harness .......................................................................21
1.8 Replacing the Power Supply...................................................................................................26
1.9 Replacing the USB Cable .......................................................................................................30
2 REPLACEMENTS IN THE CASSETTE INPUT MODULE .....................................................33

2.1 Replacing the Cassette Opener Assembly .............................................................................33
2.2 Replacing the Cassette Opener Sensor .................................................................................39
2.3 Replacing the Opener Motor M3.............................................................................................42
2.4 Replacing the toothed Belt for Opener Motor M3 ...................................................................46
2.5 Replacing the Chip Reader.....................................................................................................49
2.6 Replacing the Handling Control Board ...................................................................................52
2.7 Replacing the Cassette Unlatch Assembly.............................................................................55
2.8 Replacing the Cassette Fixation Unit......................................................................................59
2.9 Replacing the Cassette Fixing Motor M1................................................................................64
2.10 Replacing the IP Sensor Cable...............................................................................................68
2.11 Replacing the Tag Reader Cable............................................................................................71
2.12 Replacing the User Interface Cable ........................................................................................74
3 REPLACEMENTS IN THE CASSETTE TRANSPORT MODULE ..........................................77

3.1 Replacing the Drawer Unit ......................................................................................................77
3.2 Replacing the Drawer Motor M4 .............................................................................................82
3.3 Replacing the Drawer Motor Belt ............................................................................................86
3.4 Replacing the Permanent Magnets ........................................................................................89

Repair and Service
3.5 Replacing the Upper Roller Assembly ....................................................................................92
3.6 Replacing the Input Rollers.....................................................................................................95
3.7 Replacing the Transport Roller Motor M5.............................................................................101
3.8 Replacing the Belt of the Transport Roller Motor..................................................................105
3.9 Replacing the Roller Clamping Motor M6 .............................................................................110
3.10 Replacing the Belt of the Roller Clamping Motor..................................................................114
3.11 Replacing the Erasure Unit ...................................................................................................119
3.12 Replacing the Guide Plate Erasure Unit ...............................................................................121
3.13 Replacing the Roller IP Sensor.............................................................................................123
3.14 Replacing the Cleaning Brush ..............................................................................................126
4 REPLACEMENTS IN THE SCANNER MODULE.................................................................128

4.1 Replacing the Gearbox with Motor M2 and Scan Rollers.....................................................128
4.2 Replacing the Slow Scan Motor M2......................................................................................128
4.3 Replacing the Upper Scan Rollers........................................................................................131
4.4 Replacing the Reflector with Brush.......................................................................................136
4.5 Replacing the PMT with Light Collector................................................................................140
4.6 Replacing the Calibration Board ...........................................................................................141
4.7 Replacing the PMI Board ......................................................................................................145
4.8 Replacing the CF Card (Solid State Disk) ............................................................................149
4.9 Replacing the Power Integration Board ................................................................................151
4.10 Replacing the Optic Module..................................................................................................155
4.11 Replacing the Right Roller Lift Assembly..............................................................................159
4.12 Replacing the Left Roller Lift Assembly ................................................................................162
4.13 Replacing the Guide Plate Scanner Input.............................................................................168
4.14 Replacing the Pane in Scanner ............................................................................................171
4.14.1 Removing the Pane in Scanner ............................................................................................171
4.14.2 Mounting the new Pane in Scanner......................................................................................178

Repair and Service
1 Replacements at the Base Frame
1.1 Replacing the Front Cover
REQUIRED SPARE PART*:

CM+9 5178 1515 0 (Type 5175/200)
CM+604191 0 (Type 5179/100)
CM+603060 0 (Type 5175/220/225)
CM+603750 0 (Type 5175/205)
* The last digit in the spare part number

indicates the spare part revision at release of
this document. When ordering, the actual
revision of the spare part is delivered.
Figure 1
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
 5 minutes exchange
 5 minutes verification
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
(1) Switch off the digitizer (A).
(2) Disconnect the cables (B).
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 2

Repair and Service

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 3
(5) Open the upper (A) and lower A

screws (B) a few turns.
5175_c35_002.cdr
Figure 4
(6) Press both buttons at the feed B

table and pull out the front  5 cm
cover approximately 5 cm (A).
(7) Disconnect the cable (B).
(8) Remove the front cover.
5175_c35_003.cdr
Figure 5

Repair and Service
ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order.
Verification: (1) Switch on the digitizer.

(2) Wait until the green light at the user interface lights up
(takes approximately 1,5 minutes).
Result: The front cover is replaced.
1.2 Replacing the Left Cover

CM+6018180

Figure 6
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:

Repair and Service
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 7

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 8
CAUTION:

Repair and Service

5175_c35_004.cdr
Figure 9
(7) Remove the left cover.
Figure 10
ASSEMBLY:

Result: The left cover is replaced.

Repair and Service
1.3 Replacing the Right Cover

CM+9 5175 1504 1

Figure 11
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 12

Repair and Service

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 13
CAUTION:

5175_c35_004.cdr
Figure 14
(7) Remove the right cover.
Figure 15

Repair and Service
ASSEMBLY:

Result: The right cover is replaced.
1.4 Replacing the Top Cover

CM+9 5178 1525 0 (Type
5175/200/205)
CM+603061 0 (Type 5175/220/225)

Figure 16
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:

Repair and Service
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 17

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 18
CAUTION:

Repair and Service

5175_c35_004.cdr
Figure 19
ASSEMBLY:

Result: The top cover is replaced.
1.5 Replacing the User Interface Board

CM+9 5175 1580 0

Figure 20

Repair and Service
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20 Small size (PZ1)
REQUIRED TIME:
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 21

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 22

Repair and Service

5175_c35_002.cdr
Figure 23

5175_c35_003.cdr
Figure 24
(9) Remove four screws.

(10) Remove the user interface
board.
5175_c35_00B.cdr
Figure 25

Repair and Service
ASSEMBLY:

Result: The user interface board is replaced.
1.6 Replacing the Safety Switch

CM+9 5178 4010 0

Figure 26
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:

Repair and Service
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 27

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 28
CAUTION:

Repair and Service

5175_c35_004.cdr
Figure 29
Figure 30
(5) Remove two screws.
5175_c35_009.cdr
Figure 31

Repair and Service
(6) Disconnect all connectors. See

NOTE below.
5175_c35_007.cdr
Figure 32
NOTE: OK
The connectors have a lock
integrated which prevents
disconnection if pulling at the cable. NOT OK
To remove the cables pull at the
connector.
Tip: Use needle nosed pliers to
facilitate removal of the connectors. OK
5175_c35_008.cdr
Figure 33
ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order. See IMPORTANT note below.

Repair and Service
IMPORTANT:
C
To ensure proper switching of the
safety switch mount it as follows:
A
(1) Close the front cover (A).
(2) Shift the safety switch towards
the stop (B).
(3) Fasten the two safety switch B
screws (C).
5175_c35_090.cdr
Figure 34

(2) Wait for some seconds, until the red user interface LED starts blinking.
(3) Open the front cover approximately 1 to 2 cm: The safety switch has to interrupt
and the user interface LED has to go off.
Result: The Safety Switch is replaced.
1.7 Replacing the Main Switch with Wire Harness

CM+9 5178 8585 0

Figure 35
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20 7 mm Small size

(1 x 5,5 mm)

Repair and Service
REQUIRED TIME:
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 36

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 37
DANGER:
If the power cord is connected and the main switch is switched on the input
side of the power supply is connected to high voltage. Risk of life.
Remove all cables in the rear of the digitizer before opening of the rear cover

Repair and Service
(5) Open the screws in the rear (A). A

(6) Open the rear cover (B).
5175_c35_010.cdr
Figure 38
(7) Supporting the rear cover by

hand, open three screws at the
input side of the power supply a
few turns.
5175_c35_011.cdr
Figure 39
(8) Disconnect the cables at the

mains inlet.
5175_c35_012.cdr
Figure 40

Repair and Service
(9) Remove the nut (A) at the filter.

A
(10) Release the cable (B).
5175_c35_013.cdr
Figure 41

(12) Take out the Main Switch with
Wire Harness (B).
A B A
5175_C35_014.cdr
Figure 42
ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order. See Safety Notes and NOTE below.

Repair and Service

If the cables at the input side of
the power supply are mounted
wrong, the housing of the digitizer
can be connected to high voltage.
Risk of life.
Mount the cables at the power
supply input as indicated on the
cables and shown in Figure 43. green/yellow
black
5175_c35_015.cdr
black
Figure 43
WARNING:
to electric shocks.
 After any work at the power supply or at any component connected to mains
voltage inform the responsible organization 1 about the necessity of the electrical
 Make sure, that all grounding connections to metallic covers and all grounding
NOTE:
Insert the wire rope (A) in cable
holder (B) before mounting the top
cover.
A
B
5175_c35_319.cdr
Figure 44
1
Entity accountable for the use and maintenance of a medical equipment or a medical equipment system.
The accountable entity can be, for example, a hospital or an individual clinician.

Repair and Service

(2) Wait for some seconds, until the red user interface LED starts blinking.
(3) Open the front cover approximately 1 to 2 cm: The safety switch has to interrupt
and the user interface LED has to go off.
Result: The Main Switch with Wire Harness is replaced.
1.8 Replacing the Power Supply

CM+9 0486 1420 0

Figure 45
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20 Small size
REQUIRED TIME:

Repair and Service
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 46
DANGER:
If the power cord is connected and the main switch is switched on the input
side of the power supply is connected to high voltage. Risk of life.
Remove all cables in the rear of the digitizer before opening of the rear cover

5175_c35_010.cdr
Figure 47

Repair and Service
(5) Supporting the rear cover by

hand, open screws at input and
output side of the power supply
a few turns.
5175_c35_016.cdr
Figure 48
(6) Remove the power supply.
5175_c35_017.cdr
Figure 49
ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order. Observe three Safety Notes and the NOTE below.

Repair and Service

If the cables at the input side of
the power supply are mounted
wrong, the housing of the digitizer
can be connected to high voltage.
Risk of life.
Mount the cables at the power
supply input as indicated on the
cables and shown in Figure 50. green/yellow
black
5175_c35_015.cdr
black
Figure 50
CAUTION:
If the cables at the output side at the
top of the power supply are
mounted wrong, all printed circuit black red
boards will be defective after
switch-on.
Mount the cables as shown in
Figure 51.
5175_c35_017a.cdr
Figure 51
WARNING:
to electric shocks.
 After any work at the power supply or at any component connected to mains
voltage inform the responsible organization 2 about the necessity of the electrical
 Make sure, that all grounding connections to metallic covers and all grounding
2
Entity accountable for the use and maintenance of a medical equipment or a medical equipment system.
The accountable entity can be, for example, a hospital or an individual clinician.

Repair and Service
NOTE:
holder (B) before mounting the Top
Cover.
A
B
5175_c35_319.cdr
Figure 52

(2) Wait until the boot-up is finished: The user interface LED has to be green.
Result: The Power Supply is replaced.
1.9 Replacing the USB Cable

CM+9 0477 1112 0

Figure 53
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20 cutter

Repair and Service
REQUIRED TIME:
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 54

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 55
CAUTION:

Repair and Service

5175_c35_004.cdr
Figure 56
(7) Disconnect the cable at the PMI A

board (A).
(8) Cut the cable ties at the USB
connector (B).
(9) Open the cable holders.
(10) Take out the USB cable.
B
5175_c35_018.cdr
Figure 57
ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order. See NOTE below.

Repair and Service
NOTE:
Mount the cable holder this way that
the USB symbol looks to the inner
side.
5175_c35_019.cdr
Figure 58
Verification: (1) Perform a backup on USB stick. For details refer to chapter 3.2, Machine
specific Tools, Software Tools and Auxiliary Equipment.
Result: The USB cable is replaced.
2 Replacements in the Cassette Input Module
2.1 Replacing the Cassette Opener Assembly

CM+9 5178 5200 0 (without Cassette
Opener Sensor) and CM+6042090
(with Cassette Opener Sensor)

Figure 59

Repair and Service
NOTE:
For information about which type of cassette opener assembly (with / without Cassette
Opener Sensor) can be used in which digitizer (CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm) refer to the
spare parts list.
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 60

Repair and Service

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 61

5175_c35_002.cdr
Figure 62

cover approximately
5 cm (A).
5175_c35_003.cdr
Figure 63

Repair and Service
(9) Remove all cables at the

handling control board.
(10) Open all cable holders at the
handling control board. See
NOTE below.
(11) Remove one screw.
(12) Remove the handling control
board.
5175_c35_020.cdr
Figure 64
NOTE:
For opening of the rectangular cable
holders use the fingernail or a
screwdriver.
5175_c35_082.cdr
Figure 65
(13) Turn at spindle to open the

cassette fixation a few turns.
5175_c35_091.cdr
Figure 66

Repair and Service
(14) Remove the cables at the

cassette edge detection switch.
5175_c35_092.cdr
Figure 67
(15) Disconnect the cable at the

E-Label.
(16) Open the corresponding cable
holders.
5175_c35_103.cdr
Figure 68
(17) Remove the screws at the

Cassette Fixation Unit left hand
side.
5175_c35_021a.cdr
Figure 69

Repair and Service
(18) Remove the screws at the

Cassette Fixation Unit right
hand side.
(19) Remove the Cassette Fixation
Unit.
5175_c35_022.cdr A
Figure 70
(20) Remove three screws (A).

(21) Remove the Cassette Opener
assembly (B).
A
A
A
5175_C35_023.cdr
Figure 71
ASSEMBLY:
(2) Connect the cables at the
cassette edge detection switch
as shown in Figure 72
orange white black

5175_c35_095.cdr
Figure 72

Repair and Service
NOTE:
Mounting the cassette fixation unit is
easier if the cassette opener is in
position “open”. Pull at the opener belt
to open the cassette opener.
5175_c35_028.cdr
Figure 73
CALIBRATION:
(1) Perform a Cassette Opener Sensor Calibration.

Refer to chapter 3.6, Adjustments.
Verification: (1) Insert a cassette with an unexposed image plate in the digitizer.
(2) At the workstation select examination type “System diagnosis – Flatfield”.
(3) Select “ID” to identify the image: Scanning starts.
(4) Confirm that the image arrives at the workstation.
(5) Reject the image.
Result: The Cassette Opener Assembly is replaced.
2.2 Replacing the Cassette Opener Sensor

CM+6042850

Figure 74

Repair and Service
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 75

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 76

Repair and Service

5175_c35_002.cdr
Figure 77

cover approximately
5 cm (A).
5175_c35_003.cdr
Figure 78
(9) Remove four screws at the

holder of the handling control
board.
B
(10) Turn the holder with all cables
connected and lay it on top of
the cassette unit.
A
5175_c35_028a.cdr
Figure 79

Repair and Service

(12) Open cable holder (B).
(13) Disconnect cable (C).
(14) Remove the cassette opener
sensor.
Figure 80
ASSEMBLY:
Result: The Cassette Opener Sensor is replaced.
2.3 Replacing the Opener Motor M3

CM+9 5178 8530 0

Figure 81

Repair and Service
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 82

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 83

Repair and Service

5175_c35_002.cdr
Figure 84

cover approximately
5 cm (A).
5175_c35_003.cdr
Figure 85
(9) Remove cable at P10 at the

P10
5175_c35_024.a
Figure 86

Repair and Service
(10) Open cable holders.

(11) Remove four screws.
(12) Remove the motor.
5175_c35_025.ai
Figure 87
ASSEMBLY:
IMPORTANT:
Mount the motor this way that the
cable outlet at the motor is at the "9
o'clock position" (seen from the left
hand side).
5175_c35_026.ai
Result: The Opener Motor M3 is replaced.

Repair and Service
2.4 Replacing the toothed Belt for Opener Motor M3

CM+9 5178 4005 0 (Set of 4 belts for
Opener Motor M4, Transport roller
Motor M5, Drawer Motor M4, Roller
Clamping Motor M6)

Figure 88
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 89

Repair and Service

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 90

5175_c35_002.cdr
Figure 91

cover approximately
5 cm (A).
5175_c35_003.cdr
Figure 92

Repair and Service
(9) Take off the opener belt.
5175_c35_027.cdr
Figure 93
ASSEMBLY:
Result: The toothed Belt for the Opener Motor is replaced.

Repair and Service
2.5 Replacing the Chip Reader

CM+604420 0

Figure 94
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20 Small size (PZ1)
REQUIRED TIME:
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 95

Repair and Service

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 96

5175_c35_002.cdr
Figure 97

cover approximately
5 cm (A).
5175_c35_003.cdr
Figure 98

Repair and Service
(9) Pull at the opener belt to open

the cassette opener.
5175_c35_028.cdr
Figure 99

board.
B
the cassette unit.
A
5175_c35_028a.cdr
Figure 100
(12) Remove two screws (A, B). A B

(13) Disconnect cable (C).
(14) Remove the chip reader. C
5175_c35_029b.cdr
Figure 101

Repair and Service
ASSEMBLY:
Result: The Chip Reader is replaced.
2.6 Replacing the Handling Control Board

CM+9 5178 4510 0 (without
connector "P20" for Cassette Opener
Sensor) and CM+6042860 (with
connector "P20" for Cassette Opener
Sensor)

Figure 102
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
 5 minutes stall calibration

Repair and Service
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 103

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 104

5175_c35_002.cdr
Figure 105

Repair and Service

cover approximately
5 cm (A).
5175_c35_003.cdr
Figure 106
(9) Remove all cables at the

(10) Remove one screw.
(11) Remove the handling control
board.
5175_c35_020.cdr
Figure 107
ASSEMBLY:
(2) Perform a software installation if required. See IMPORTANT note below.
Refer to the installation instructions enclosed to the software on the Agfa
HealthCare Library => Computed Radiography => CR Digitizer =>
CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-X m => Software.

Repair and Service
IMPORTANT:
After switch on its is possible that error 4230 pops up, indicating a software mismatch
between the installed software and the software which was installed on the Handling
Control Board in production.
To solve this error, install the latest digitizer software. The software including
installation instructions is available on the Agfa HealthCare Library.
CALIBRATION:
(1) Perform a stall calibration for all motors.

Result: The Handling Control Board is replaced.
2.7 Replacing the Cassette Unlatch Assembly

CM+9 5178 5600 0

Figure 108
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20

Repair and Service
REQUIRED TIME:
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 109

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 110

Repair and Service

5175_c35_002.cdr
Figure 111

cover approximately
5 cm (A).
5175_c35_003.cdr
Figure 112

P8
5175_c35_030.ai
Figure 113

Repair and Service
(11) Remove three screws.

(12) Remove the unlatch assembly.
5175_c35_unlatch.cdr
Figure 114
ASSEMBLY:
NOTE:
Use the notch in the motor base plate
to mount the unlatch assembly
properly in its mounting pins.
5175_c35_085.cdr
Figure 115
CALIBRATION:
(1) Perform a stall calibration for the unlatch motor.


Repair and Service
Result: The cassette unlatch assembly is replaced.
2.8 Replacing the Cassette Fixation Unit

CM+9 5178 5800 0

Figure 116
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:

Repair and Service
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 117

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 118

5175_c35_002.cdr
Figure 119

Repair and Service

cover approximately
5 cm (A).
5175_c35_003.cdr
Figure 120
(9) Disconnect connectors P7 and

P8 at the handling control
board.
P8
P7
5175_c35_086.ai
Figure 121
(10) Remove the cables at the

cassette edge detection switch.
5175_c35_092.cdr
Figure 122

Repair and Service

(13) Remove the Cassette Unlatch
Assembly.
Figure 123
(14) Remove screws at the Cassette

Fixation Unit left hand side.
5175_c35_021a.cdr
Figure 124
(15) Remove screws at the Cassette

Fixation Unit right hand side
(A).
(16) Remove Cassette Fixation
Unit (B).
5175_c35_022.cdr A
Figure 125

Repair and Service
ASSEMBLY:
cassette edge detection switch
as shown in Figure 126.
orange white black

5175_c35_095.cdr
Figure 126
CALIBRATION:
(1) Perform a stall calibration for the fixation motor.

Result: The Cassette Opener Assembly is replaced.

Repair and Service
2.9 Replacing the Cassette Fixing Motor M1

CM+9 5178 5810 0

Figure 127
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 128

Repair and Service

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 129

5175_c35_002.cdr
Figure 130

table and pull out the front cover  5 cm
approximately 5 cm (A).
5175_c35_003.cdr
Figure 131

Repair and Service

P7
5175_c35_031.ai
Figure 132

(12) Put the unlatch assembly on the
table.
Figure 133
(13) Remove three screws at the

cassette fixing motor M1.
5175_c35_032.ai
Figure 134

Repair and Service
ASSEMBLY:
IMPORTANT:
cable outlet at the motor is positioned
to the "3 o'clock position" (seen from
the right hand side).
5175_c35_033.ai
Figure 135
CALIBRATION:
(1) Perform a stall calibration for the cassette fixation motor.

Result: The Cassette Fixation Motor is replaced.

Repair and Service
2.10 Replacing the IP Sensor Cable

CM+9 5178 8620 0

Figure 136
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 137

Repair and Service

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 138

5175_c35_002.cdr
Figure 139

cover approximately
5 cm (A).
5175_c35_003.cdr
Figure 140

Repair and Service
(9) Remove cable at connector

board.
P18
5175_c35_034.ai
Figure 141

(11) Disconnect cable at the Roller
IP Sensor.
5175_c35_035.ai
Figure 142
ASSEMBLY:
Result: The IP Sensor Cable is replaced.

Repair and Service
2.11 Replacing the Tag Reader Cable

CM+9 5178 8610 0

Figure 143
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 144

Repair and Service

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 145

5175_c35_002.cdr
Figure 146

cover approximately
5 cm (A).
5175_c35_003.cdr
Figure 147

Repair and Service

board.
B
the cassette unit.
A
5175_c35_028a.cdr
Figure 148
(11) Open the cable holders.

(12) Disconnect the cable at the Tag
Reader.
5175_c35_036.cdr
Figure 149
ASSEMBLY:
Result: The Tag Reader Cable is replaced.

Repair and Service
2.12 Replacing the User Interface Cable

CM+9 5178 8630 0

Figure 150
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 151

Repair and Service

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 152

5175_c35_002.cdr
Figure 153

table and pull out the front

cover approximately
5 cm (A).
5175_c35_003.cdr
Figure 154

Repair and Service

board.
(10) Open cable holders. P17
(11) Remove the user interface

cable.
5175_c35_037a.ai
Figure 155
ASSEMBLY:
Result: The User Interface Cable is replaced.

Repair and Service
3 Replacements in the Cassette Transport Module
3.1 Replacing the Drawer Unit

CM+9 5178 6700 0

Figure 156
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 157

Repair and Service

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 158
(5) Disconnect two cables (A, B) at

the Erasure Unit.
(6) Open cable holder (C).
(7) Remove the screw for the
erasure unit (D).
(8) Remove the erasure unit.
Figure 159
CAUTION:

Repair and Service
(9) Open the cassette unit by

turning at the belt.
Figure 160
(10) Remove the IP Guide Plate.
5175_c35_039.cdr
Figure 161

(12) Remove the toothed belt (B).
A
B
5175_c35_040.cdr
Figure 162

Repair and Service
(13) Shift the drawer unit to the

front.
(14) Remove two screws.
5175_c35_041A.cdr
Figure 163
(15) Lift-up the drawer unit upper

plate.
5175_c35_043A.cdr
Figure 164
(16) Shift back the drawer unit as far

as possible (A).
(17) Lift up the tray flap support (B).
(18) Take off the drawer unit (C).
See IMPORTANT note below.
Figure 165

Repair and Service
IMPORTANT:
Take care not to damage the surface of the transport rollers when removing and
mounting the drawer unit.
ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order. See NOTE below.
NOTE:
 Use the visual positioning aid to
position the drawer unit
properly. See Figure 166.
 Mount the belt before mounting
the screws.
5175_c35_043C.cdr
Figure 166
CALIBRATION:
(1) Perform a stall calibration for the drawer motor.

Result: The Drawer Unit is replaced.

Repair and Service
3.2 Replacing the Drawer Motor M4

CM+9 5178 6055 0

Figure 167
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 168

Repair and Service

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 169

5175_c35_002.cdr
Figure 170

cover approximately
5 cm (A).
5175_c35_003.cdr
Figure 171

Repair and Service
(9) Remove cable at connector P9

at the handling control board.
P9
5175_c35_043.ai
Figure 172

the Erasure Unit.
(13) Remove the mounting screw
(D).
Figure 173
CAUTION:

Repair and Service
5175_c35_039.cdr
Figure 174
(16) Shift back the drawer unit.

B
(17) Lift-up the drawer unit plate (A).
(18) Remove two screws (B).
(19) Remove the toothed belt.
(20) Remove the drawer motor. A
5175_c35_044.cdr
Figure 175
ASSEMBLY:
CALIBRATION:


Repair and Service
Result: The Drawer Motor is replaced.
3.3 Replacing the Drawer Motor Belt

Clamping Motor M6)

Figure 176
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:

Repair and Service
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 177

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 178
(5) Disconnect two cables at the

Erasure Unit (A, B).
(D).
Figure 179

Repair and Service
CAUTION:
5175_c35_039.cdr
Figure 180
(10) Lift-up the drawer unit

plate (A).
(11) Remove the toothed belt.
5175_c35_045.cdr
Figure 181
ASSEMBLY:

Repair and Service
CALIBRATION:

Result: The Drawer Motor belt is replaced.
3.4 Replacing the Permanent Magnets

CM+9 5178 6765 0

Figure 182
REQUIRED TOOLS:
Small size
(1 x 5,5 mm)
REQUIRED TIME:

Repair and Service
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 183

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 184

the Erasure Unit.
(D).
Figure 185

Repair and Service
CAUTION:
5175_c35_039.cdr
Figure 186
(10) Shift back the drawer unit (A) A

(11) Replace the three large
permanent magnets (B).
(12) Replace the two small
permanent magnets (C).
B B
B
5175_c35_047.cdr
Figure 187
ASSEMBLY:

Repair and Service
Result: The Permanent Magnets are replaced.
3.5 Replacing the Upper Roller Assembly

CM+9 5178 6400 0

Figure 188
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:

Repair and Service
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 189

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 190

the Erasure Unit.
erasure unit (D).
Figure 191

Repair and Service
5175_c35_039.cdr
Figure 192

(11) Remove two screws on the
right (A) and two screws on the
left (B).
(12) Take out the Upper Roller
Assembly. B B
5175_c35_048.cdr
A A
Figure 193
ASSEMBLY:
IMPORTANT:
Handle the upper roller assembly carefully: The rollers are sensitive.

Repair and Service
Result: The Upper Roller Assembly is replaced.
3.6 Replacing the Input Rollers

CM+9 5178 6325 0

Figure 194
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:

Repair and Service
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 195

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 196

5175_c35_002.cdr
Figure 197

Repair and Service

cover approximately
5 cm (A).
5175_c35_003.cdr
Figure 198

board.
P13
5175_c35_049.ai
Figure 199
IMPORTANT:
The motor is mounted with one spacer.
Take care not to loose the spacer.
5175_c35_050.ai
Figure 200

Repair and Service
(11) Open three screws.

5175_c35_051.ai
Figure 201

the Erasure Unit.
erasure unit (D).
Figure 202
5175_c35_039.cdr
Figure 203

Repair and Service

(19) Remove two screws on the
right (A) and two screws on the
left (B).
(20) Take out the Upper Roller
Assembly. B B
5175_c35_048.cdr
A A
Figure 204
(21) Using a screwdriver remove

two ball bearings at left hand
side.
5175_c35_105.cdr
Figure 205
(22) Using a screwdriver remove

two ball bearings at right hand
side.
5175_c35_106.cdr
Figure 206

Repair and Service
(23) Take off the lower roller

assembly.
5175_c35_107.cdr
Figure 207
(24) Dismount the rollers. Take care

not to loose the two pins.
(25) Mount the new rollers at the
correct positions as shown in
Figure 208.
5175_c35_104.cdr
Figure 208
ASSEMBLY:

Repair and Service
IMPORTANT:
5175_c35_052.ai
Figure 209
Result: The Input Roller Assembly is replaced.
3.7 Replacing the Transport Roller Motor M5

CM+9 5178 4519 0

Figure 210

Repair and Service
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 211

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 212

Repair and Service

5175_c35_002.cdr
Figure 213

cover approximately
5 cm (A).
5175_c35_003.cdr
Figure 214

board.
P13
5175_c35_049.ai
Figure 215

Repair and Service
IMPORTANT:
5175_c35_050.ai
Figure 216
(11) Open three screws.

5175_c35_051.ai
Figure 217
ASSEMBLY:

Repair and Service
IMPORTANT:
5175_c35_052.ai
Figure 218
Result: The Transport Roller Motor is replaced.
3.8 Replacing the Belt of the Transport Roller Motor

Clamping Motor M6)

Figure 219

Repair and Service
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 220

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 221

Repair and Service

5175_c35_002.cdr
Figure 222

5175_c35_003.cdr
Figure 223
(9) Open three screws. See

IMPORTANT note below.
5175_c35_051.ai
Figure 224

Repair and Service
IMPORTANT:
5175_c35_050.ai
Figure 225
(11) Remove the belt.
5175_c35_053.cdr
Figure 226
ASSEMBLY:

Repair and Service
IMPORTANT:
5175_c35_052.ai
Figure 227
Result: The Transport Roller Motor Belt is replaced.

Repair and Service
3.9 Replacing the Roller Clamping Motor M6

CM+9 5178 6025 0

Figure 228
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 229

Repair and Service

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 230

5175_c35_002.cdr
Figure 231

cover approximately
5 cm (A).
5175_c35_003.cdr
Figure 232

Repair and Service
(15) Remove cable at P12 of the

P12
5175_c35_054.ai
Figure 233

the Erasure Unit.
erasure unit (D).
Figure 234
CAUTION:

Repair and Service
5175_c35_039.cdr
Figure 235

(22) Remove the screws.
5175_c35_055.ai
Figure 236
ASSEMBLY:
CALIBRATION:
(1) Perform a stall calibration for the Roller Clamping Motor (M6).

Repair and Service
Result: The Roller Clamping Motor M6 is replaced.
3.10 Replacing the Belt of the Roller Clamping Motor

Clamping Motor M6)

Figure 237
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:

Repair and Service
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 238

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 239

the Erasure Unit.
erasure unit (D).
Figure 240

Repair and Service
CAUTION:
5175_c35_039.cdr
Figure 241
(10) Lift up the upper plate of the

drawer unit (A).
(11) Remove two screws at the
bearing plate (B, C).
B
A
C
B
5175_c35_096.cdr
Figure 242

Repair and Service

(13) Remove the screws.
5175_c35_055.ai
Figure 243
(15) Shift the guide plate to the rear.
5175_c35_088.cdr
Figure 244
(16) Shift the roller to the right.

(17) Take out the belt.
5175_c35_056.cdr
Figure 245

Repair and Service
ASSEMBLY:
CALIBRATION:
(1) Perform a stall calibration for the Roller Clamping Motor (M6).
Result: The Roller Clamping Motor Belt is replaced.

Repair and Service
3.11 Replacing the Erasure Unit

CM+9 5178 3600 0 (CR 30-X 2nd)
CM+604110 0 (CR 30-Xm)

Figure 246
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 247

Repair and Service

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 248

the Erasure Unit.
erasure unit (D).
Figure 249
ASSEMBLY:
Result: The Erasure Unit is replaced.

Repair and Service
3.12 Replacing the Guide Plate Erasure Unit

CM+9 5178 6013 0

Figure 250
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 251

Repair and Service

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 252

the Erasure Unit.
(D).
(8) Remove the Erasure Unit.
Figure 253
CAUTION:

Repair and Service
5175_c35_039.cdr
Figure 254
ASSEMBLY:
Result: The Guide Plate Erasure Unit is replaced.
3.13 Replacing the Roller IP Sensor

CM+9 9499 6950 0

Figure 255

Repair and Service
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 256

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 257

Repair and Service
(5) Disconnect the cable (A).

(6) Remove the Roller IP Sensor A
(B).
B
5175_c35_035a.cdr
Figure 258
ASSEMBLY:
Result: The Roller IP Sensor is replaced.

Repair and Service
3.14 Replacing the Cleaning Brush

CM+8 5175 1410 0

Figure 259
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 260

Repair and Service

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 261
(5) Take out the cleaning brush.
5175_c35_058.cdr
Figure 262
ASSEMBLY:

Result: The Cleaning Brush is replaced.

Repair and Service
4 Replacements in the Scanner Module
4.1 Replacing the Gearbox with Motor M2 and Scan Rollers
The replacement instructions for the Gearbox with Motor M2 and Scan Rollers, spare
part number* CM+9 5178 2500 1 (CR 30-X 2nd) and CM+604232 0 (CR 30-Xm), are
enclosed to the spare part.
Document ID: 35407828
4.2 Replacing the Slow Scan Motor M2

CM+9 5178 2580 0

Figure 263
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20 2,5 mm
NOTE:
The Allen key 2,5 mm is part of delivery. It is required for the coupling between slow
scan drive and slow scan gearbox.
REQUIRED TIME:

Repair and Service
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 264

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 265
CAUTION:

Repair and Service

5175_c35_004.cdr
Figure 266
Figure 267
(8) Disconnect the slow scan motor A

(A).
(9) Open the screw at the slow
scan coupling approximately
two turns (B).
(10) Remove the slow scan motor
(C).
B
B
Figure 268
ASSEMBLY:

Repair and Service
Result: The slow scan motor M2 is replaced.
4.3 Replacing the Upper Scan Rollers

CM+9 5178 2650 0 (CR 30-X 2nd)
CM+604909 0 (CR 30-Xm)
Figure 269
NOTE:
The front and rear scan rollers are different. As the left ball bearings are different in size
they only fit in the corresponding bearing seat. A mix-up is not possible.
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20 Small size

(1 x 5,5 mm)
REQUIRED TIME:

Repair and Service
IMPORTANT:
Handle the scan rollers carefully. They have a sensitive surface.
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 270

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 271
CAUTION:

Repair and Service

5175_c35_004.cdr
Figure 272

5175_c35_010.cdr
Figure 273
Figure 274

Repair and Service
(10) Remove the mounting

screws (A).
(11) Remove the roller lift
assembly (B).
A A
B
A
5175_ENC_201.cdr
Figure 275
(12) Take out the upper scan

rollers.
5175_c35_061a.cdr
Figure 276
ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order. See two NOTEs below.

Repair and Service
NOTE:
When inserting the new upper scan
rollers slightly press down the roller
clamps using a small screwdriver.
5175_c35_062A.cdr
Figure 277
NOTE:
Cover.
A
B
5175_c35_319.cdr
Figure 278
Result: The Upper Scan Rollers are replaced.

Repair and Service
4.4 Replacing the Reflector with Brush

CM+9 5178 3020 2 (CR 30-X 2nd)
CM+604106 0 (CR 30-Xm)

Figure 279
CAUTION:
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20 TX30
REQUIRED TIME:
 30 minutes shading calibration

Repair and Service
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 280

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 281
CAUTION:

Repair and Service

5175_c35_004.cdr
Figure 282

adapter board.
5175_c35_101.cdr
Figure 283

optic module.
(9) Remove the optic module.
5175_c35_102.cdr
Figure 284

Repair and Service
(10) Remove two screws

(11) Take out the reflector with
brush.
5175_c35_064.cdr
Figure 285
ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order. See two IMPORTANT notes below..
IMPORTANT:
Remove the adhesive foil from the mirror before mounting.
IMPORTANT:
Check whether the connector at the
PMI Board is properly closed. This
may be accidentally opened when
inserting the optic module.
5175_c35_074.ai
Figure 286
CALIBRATION:
(1) Perform a shading calibration.
Refer to chapter 3.6, Adjustments and Calibrations.

Repair and Service
Verification: The verification is done during the shading calibration procedure. There at the end a
flatfield is scanned and evaluated.
Result: The Reflector with Brush is replaced.
4.5 Replacing the PMT with Light Collector
The replacement instructions for the PMT with Light Collector, spare part number*
CM+9 5178 3140 3 (for CR 30-X 2nd) and CM+604107 0 (for CR 30-Xm), are enclosed
to the spare part. Document ID: 35393909
The last digit in the spare part number indicates the spare part revision at release of this document. When
ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.

Repair and Service
4.6 Replacing the Calibration Board

CM+9 5178 2470 0

Figure 287
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
Preparation:
(1) Switch on the digitizer and NX workstation.
(2) Open the browser.
(3) Start the internet explorer.
(4) Enter the IP address of the digitizer in the address window.
(5) Enter username and password.

Repair and Service
NOTE:
If the digitizer IP address is not known, look it up in the NX configuration tool:
 Double-click the icon <Start NX Configurator> on the desktop.
 Select: Load active configuration
 Go to: Devices > Digitizer Configuration
This page shows the digitizer IP address.
 Quit the NX Configurator (Close without saving any changes).
(6) Select: <Prepare CAL.

Board replacement>.
(7) Click on: <Start>
(8) Wait until message appears:
"Switch off the device and
dismantle the CALIBRATION
BOARD" (takes approx. 5
seconds)
Figure 288
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 289

Repair and Service

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 290
CAUTION:

5175_c35_004.cdr
Figure 291
Figure 292

Repair and Service

screws (A).
(9) Remove the roller lift assembly
(B).
A A
B
A
5175_ENC_201.cdr
Figure 293
(10) Open two screws (A).

(11) Pull out the calibration board a
few centimeters (B).
(12) Disconnect the cable (C).
(13) Remove the calibration board.
5175_c35_065.cdr
C
Figure 294
ASSEMBLY:

Repair and Service
IMPORTANT:
 Connect the cable before
pushing in the calibration board.
 Check the proper seat of the
alignment pin before mounting
the screws of the calibration
board. See Figure 295.
Alignment Pin
5175_c35_066.cdr
Figure 295
Result: The Calibration Board is replaced.
4.7 Replacing the PMI Board

CM+9 5178 2170 0

Figure 296
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20

Repair and Service
REQUIRED TIME:
IMPORTANT:
It is strongly recommended not to replace PMI board and CF card at the same time.
Reason: In this case the network settings are lost. The software installation instructions
describe a method to recover from missing network settings. Nevertheless it is advised
to avoid this situation.
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 297

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 298

Repair and Service
CAUTION:

5175_c35_004.cdr
Figure 299
(7) Open two screws and shift back

the cable retainer (A).
A
(8) Fasten the two screws of the
cable retainer.
PMT board (B).
5175_c35_083.cdr
Figure 300
CAUTION:

Repair and Service
(10) Disconnect connector (A). C A

D B
(11) Remove the grounding screw
(B) at the PMT board. Take
care not to lose the washer.
(12) Remove CF card retainer with
screw (C).
(13) Disconnect the
PMT board (D).
E
(14) Open one connector at the
PMI board (E).
5175_c35_077.cdr
Figure 301
(15) Disconnect five cables at the

PMI board (A).
B
(16) Remove two screws (B).
(17) Take out the PMI board. A
5175_c35_068.cdr
Figure 302
(18) Insert the CF card in the new

PMI board.
5175_c35_070.cdr
Figure 303

Repair and Service
ASSEMBLY:
IMPORTANT:
Mount the washer at the PMT board
grounding screw with the serrated
side down.
5175_c35_320.cdr
Figure 304
Result: The PMI Board is replaced.
4.8 Replacing the CF Card (Solid State Disk)

CM+9 5170 9885 0

Figure 305

Repair and Service
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
 10 minutes software installation
IMPORTANT:
It is strongly recommended not to replace PMI board and CF card at the same time.
Reason: In this case the network settings are lost. The software installation instructions
describe a method to recover from missing network settings. Nevertheless it is advised
to avoid this situation.
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 306

Repair and Service
(3) Remove screw with holder (A). A

(4) Pull out the CF card (B).
5175_c35_321.cdr
Figure 307
ASSEMBLY:
(2) Perform a software installation.
Refer to the installation instructions enclosed to the software on the Agfa
HealthCare Library => Computed Radiography => CR Digitizer =>
CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-X m => Software.
Verification: The verification is done during software installation. There at the end a flatfield image is
scanned and evaluated.
Result: The CF card is replaced.
4.9 Replacing the Power Integration Board

CM+9 5178 4550 0

Figure 308

Repair and Service
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 309

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 310

Repair and Service
CAUTION:

5175_c35_004.cdr
Figure 311
(7) Disconnect the two cables (A)

at the Power Integration Board.
(8) Remove one screw (B).
(9) Remove the Power Integration
Board. A
5175_c35_071.cdr
Figure 312
ASSEMBLY:

Repair and Service
Result: The Power Integration Board is replaced.

Repair and Service
4.10 Replacing the Optic Module

CM+9 5178 2750 1 (CR 30-X2nd)
Tx30
CM+604108 0 (CR 30-Xm)
Figure 313
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX30 TX20
1,5 mm Copper Filter*

CM+9 5155 1015 2
NOTE:
The 2 mm aluminum filter is required for CR 30-Xm only, if a Mammography modality is
used for shading calibration. For more information refer to service manual chapter 3.6,
Adjustments and Calibrations.
REQUIRED TIME:

Repair and Service
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 314

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 315
CAUTION:

Repair and Service

5175_c35_004.cdr
Figure 316

adapter board.
5175_c35_101.cdr
Figure 317

optic module.
5175_c35_102.cdr
Figure 318

Repair and Service
ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order. SEE IMPORTANT note below.
IMPORTANT:
Check whether the connector at the
PMI Board is properly closed. This
may be accidentally opened when
inserting the new optic module.
5175_c35_074.ai
Figure 319
CALIBRATION:
Result: The Optic Module is replaced.

Repair and Service
4.11 Replacing the Right Roller Lift Assembly

CM+6024710 (with standard spring
force)**
CM+6048600 (with increased spring
force of 60 N)**

Figure 320
**NOTE:
The spare part "CM+6048600" has a sticker mounted "Spring force: 60 N".
For up-to-date information concerning compatibility to CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm refer to
the spare parts list.
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:

Repair and Service

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 321
CAUTION:
Components underneath the top cover can be damaged.
Carefully take off the top cover.

5175_c35_004.cdr
Figure 322

Repair and Service
Figure 323

screws (A).
assembly (B).
A A
B
A
5175_ENC_201.cdr
Figure 324
ASSEMBLY:
Result: The Left Roller Lift Assembly is replaced.

Repair and Service
4.12 Replacing the Left Roller Lift Assembly

CM+6024690 (with standard spring
force)**
CM+6048590 (with increased spring
force of 60 N)**

Figure 325
**NOTE:
The spare part "CM+6048590" has a sticker mounted "Spring force: 60 N".
For up-to-date information concerning compatibility to CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm refer to
the spare parts list.
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20 Small size

(1 x 5,5 mm)
REQUIRED TIME:

Repair and Service
DISASSEMBLY: A
(1) Switch off the digitizer (A). OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 326

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 327
CAUTION:
Components underneath the top cover can be damaged.
Carefully take off the top cover.

Repair and Service

5175_c35_004.cdr
Figure 328
(7) Open the screws in the rear A

(A).
5175_c35_010.cdr
Figure 329
Figure 330

Repair and Service
Figure 331

screws (A).
assembly (B).
A A
B
A
5175_ENC_201.cdr
Figure 332
(13) Take out the upper scan

rollers.
5175_c35_061a.cdr
Figure 333

Repair and Service
(14) Disconnect the A

motor cable (A).
(15) Disconnect the cable at the
E-Label (B).
(16) Remove four screws (C). B
(17) Take out Gearbox with Motor C

and Scan Rollers (D). C
C
5175_c35_081.cdr
C
Figure 334

(19) Remove the Left Roller Lift
Assembly.
5175_c35_322.cdr
Figure 335
ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order. See two NOTEs below.

Repair and Service
NOTE:
When inserting the scan rollers
slightly press down the roller clamps
using a small screwdriver..
5175_c35_062A.cdr
Figure 336
NOTE:
Cover.
A
B
5175_c35_319.cdr
Figure 337
Result: The Left Roller Lift Assembly is replaced.

Repair and Service
4.13 Replacing the Guide Plate Scanner Input

CM+9 5178 2484 0

Figure 338
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20
REQUIRED TIME:
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 339

Repair and Service

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 340
CAUTION:
5175_c35_004.cdr
Figure 341
Figure 342

Repair and Service
Figure 343
(9) Remove the screws of the

guide plate.
(10) Take out the guide plate.
5175_c35_075.cdr
Figure 344
ASSEMBLY:
Result: The Guide Plate Scanner Input is replaced.

Repair and Service
4.14 Replacing the Pane in Scanner

CM+9 5178 2413 0

Figure 345
REQUIRED TOOLS:
TX20 TX30
REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1 hour
4.14.1 Removing the Pane in Scanner
DISASSEMBLY: A
OFF
5175_c35_001.cdr
Figure 346

Repair and Service

table (A).
B
5175_c35_00A.cdr
Figure 347
CAUTION:

5175_c35_004.cdr
Figure 348
Figure 349

Repair and Service
(8) Open the screws in the A

rear (A).
5175_c35_010a.cdr
Figure 350

screws (A).
assembly (B).
A A
B
A
5175_ENC_201.cdr
Figure 351

(13) Pull out the calibration board a
few centimeters (B).
(14) Disconnect the cable (C).
(15) Remove the calibration board.
5175_c35_065.cdr
C
Figure 352

Repair and Service

adapter board.
5175_c35_101.cdr
Figure 353

optic module.
5175_c35_102.cdr
Figure 354
(13) Remove four screws (A) at

the rear bracket.
(14) Remove two screws (B) at
the IP guide.
A
(15) Remove the rear bracket A
with IP guide (C).
C
B
B
5175_ENC_305.cdr
Figure 355

Repair and Service
(16) Open two screws and shift

back the cable retainer (A).
A
(17) Fasten the two screws of the
cable retainer.
PMT board (B).
5175_c35_083.cdr
Figure 356
CAUTION:
(19) Disconnect connector (A). C A

D B
(20) Remove the grounding screw
(B) at the PMT board. Take
care not to lose the washer.
(21) Remove CF card retainer with
screw (C).
(22) Disconnect the
PMT board (D).
E
(23) Open one connector at the
PMI board (E).
5175_c35_077.cdr
Figure 357
CAUTION:
The spring package at the light collector fixation screws may fall off.
Stop opening the light collector fixation screws when they reach their upper position:.

Repair and Service
(24) Open the Light Collector

fixation screws until they
reach their upper
end position (approximately
15 turns).
Figure 358
NOTE:
The light collector fixation screws have 5 disk springs attached to ensure a fixed
pressure when the screws are completely screwed down.
The disk spring package is either fixed via a small retaining ring (Fixation screw
type I - first Digitizers CR 30-X 2nd only) or via fitted bolt (Fixation screw type II).
The retaining ring or fitted bolt may fall off, when the fixation screws are opened
more than 15 turns, and force is applied to drive the spring package against the
stop. Note, that the fixation screws type I are more sensitive.
Figure 359

Repair and Service
(25) Remove two screws at

the PMT.
5175_ENC_308.cdr
Figure 360
(26) Shift the PMT with Light

Collector slightly up to release
A
the retainer screw (A).
(27) Carefully slide out the PMT A
with Light Collector (B).
5175_ENC_309.cdr
Figure 361
(28) Remove one screw of the rear

brush.
5175_c35_323.cdr
Figure 362

Repair and Service
(29) Take out the pane.
5175_c35_325.cdr
Figure 363
4.14.2 Mounting the new Pane in Scanner
ASSEMBLY:
(1) Insert the new Pane in
Scanner.
(2) Mount the screw at the rear
brush.
(3) Insert the calibration board.
Stop at approximately 5
centimeters before it is
completely in.
(4) Mount the cable. Alignment Pin
(5) Insert the calibration board. 5175_c35_066.cdr
Check the proper seat of the Figure 364

alignment pin before mounting
the screws of the calibration
board. See Figure 364.
(6) Mount the right Roller Lift
Assembly.

Repair and Service
(7) Carefully insert the PMT with

Light Collector (A).
(8) Insert the retainer screw (B).
B
5175_ENC_312.cdr
Figure 365
(9) Verify the proper mounting of

the Light Collector:
The retainer screw has to be
centered and has to sit on its
notch.
Figure 366
(10) Mount one screw at the PMT

approximately 2 turns:
Do not fasten it yet.
2x
5175_ENC_313.cdr
Figure 367

Repair and Service
(11) Shift the light collector to the

right.
See IMPORTANT note below.
5175_ENC_314.cdr
Figure 368
IMPORTANT::
The clearance of the light collector in the sand casting plate is approximately 1 mm.
To ensure, that the light collector is always mounted at the same position, the right
hand side is defined as "Zero position".
(12) Screw down both Light

Collector fixation screws
(Figure 369 only shows the
right one).
Fasten it with normal force.
Figure 369

Repair and Service
(13) Mount the second screw at

the PMT.
(14) Fixate both screws.
5175_ENC_316.cdr
Figure 370
(15) Mount the PMT board.

Be sure to mount the washer
at the PMT board grounding
screw with the serrated side
down.
See also IMPORTANT note
next page.
(16) Mount the connector (A).
5175_c35_318.cdr
Figure 371

PMT board lower side.
(18) Mount the rear bracket with
film guide.
A
(19) Mount the optic module.
(20) Close the rear cover.
(21) Insert the wire rope (A) in
cable holder (B) as shown in
Figure 372.
(22) Close all covers.
B
5175_c35_319.cdr
Figure 372

Repair and Service
CALIBRATION:
Result: The Pane in Scanner is replaced.

Chapter 3.6
Imaging Services
Adjustments and Calibrations
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
CR 30-Xm
Type 5179 / 100
This document describes all adjustments and calibrations that may be required during
corrective and preventive maintenance.

1.1 02-2012  Added shading calibration procedure for CR 30-Xm.
 Removed description for change in calibration procedure if
Full Leg / Full Spine cassette is used.
Document Title
DD+DIS230.10E CR 30-X 2nd, CR 30-Xm, Service Documentation
Chapter 3.5, Replacements / Repair Procedures

eq_03-6_adjustments_e_template_v07
Repair and Service
DD+DIS230.10E Adjustments and Calibrations
► Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 München
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the product.
NOTE:

Repair and Service
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 OVERVIEW OF ADJUSTMENTS AND CALIBRATIONS.........................................................4

2 SHADING CALIBRATION ........................................................................................................5
2.1 Selecting and Checking the Cassette.......................................................................................6
2.2 Exposing the Cassette ..............................................................................................................7
2.2.1 Exposing the Genrad Cassette at a Genrad Modality ..............................................................7
2.2.2 Exposing the Mammography Cassettes at a Mammography Modality ....................................8
2.3 Scanning the Cassette..............................................................................................................8
2.4 Verifying a successful Shading Calibration.............................................................................12
2.5 Appendix: Possible Reasons for a failed Shading Calibration................................................12
3 STALL CALIBRATION............................................................................................................13
4 CASSETTE OPENER SENSOR CALIBRATION ...................................................................15

Repair and Service
1 Overview of Adjustments and Calibrations
The following tables give an overview of adjustments and calibrations for the digitizer.
Adjustment Type Use Case Section

-- No adjustments required --
Calibration Type Use Case Section
Shading calibration  After replacement of the PMT with Light 2

collector
 After replacement of the Optic Module
 After replacement of the Reflector with Brush
 Whenever stripes in slow scan position are
visible which cannot be removed by cleaning
with the cleaning brush
Stall calibration  After replacement of following spare parts: 3

o Cassette Fixation Unit
o Cassette Fixing Motor (M1)
o Cassette Unlatch Assembly
o Drawer Unit
o Drawer Unit motor (M4)
o Roller Clamping Motor (M6)
o Toothed belt for the Drawer Motor (M4)
o Toothed belt for the Roller Clamping Motor
(M6)
 After replacement of the Handling Control
Board (as this has the motor controllers
built in)
Cassette Opener  After replacement of the Cassette Opener 4

Sensor calibration Assembly

Repair and Service
2 Shading Calibration
NOTE:
The shading calibration procedure depends on the application type of the
installed system:
 Genrad or mixed use ("Mixed use" means: Genrad and Mammography):
Shading calibration has to be made at a Genrad modality with the largest available
Genrad cassette.
 Mammography only:
Shading calibration has to be made at a Mammography modality with both formats
(18x24 cm, 24x30 cm).
CR 30-Xm and CR 30-X 2nd can be distinguished

CR 30-Xm CR 30-X
by the imprint on the front cover.
Note, that CR 30-X 2nd digitizers with sub-type 220
and 225 do not have "CR 30-X" printed on the front
m
cover. They can be clearly identified by the type
number 5175/200 or 5175/225 on the type label.
Figure 1
Purpose Determine the sensitivity of the scanning system for each pixel of the scan line:
A flatfield is scanned. For each pixel a sensitivity factor is stored in an EEPROM
on the PMT.
Use Case Perform a shading calibration in following cases:

 After replacement of the Photomultiplier (PMT) with light collector
 After replacement of the Optic Module
 After replacement of the Reflector with Brush
 Whenever stripes in slow scan position are visible, which cannot be removed by
cleaning of the scan line with the cleaning brush

Repair and Service
REQUIRED TOOLS:
1,5 mm Copper Filter* 2 mm Al Filter**

CM+9 5155 1015 2 CM+9 5148 1090 0
USB Flash Drive*:

CM+6037431 (for CR 30-X 2nd)
CM+6045180 (for CR 30-Xm)
* The last digit in the spare part number indicates the spare part revision at release of
this document. When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.
** The 2 mm Al filter is required for CR 30-Xm only, if no Genrad but a Mammography modality is
available for shading calibration.
REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1 hour
2.1 Selecting and Checking the Cassette
(1) Select the largest available Genrad cassette.

If only Mammography cassettes are available:
Use one cassette 18x24 cm and one cassette 24x30 cm (if both formats are
available on site).
(2) Open the cassette(s) and check that the image plate (IP) is free of
contamination and without any signs of wear or defects like scratches or split
off parts.
If any particles are detected, clean the IP according to the dedicated cleaning
procedure. See also NOTE below. If any defects are detected, inform the
customer about the defect and use another artifact free image plate.
(3) Erase the image plate.
NOTE:
For CR MD4.xT General image plates and CR MM3.0T Mammo image plates only use
AGFA CR Phosphor Plate cleaner and a soft lint-free cellulose cloth or Polynit wipes to
clean the image plate..
For more information refer to the user manual "CR 30-X/CR 30-Xm Plates and
Cassettes". This manual is part of digitizer delivery and is available on the

Repair and Service
2.2 Exposing the Cassette
The exposure of the cassette depends on the modality:
Modality Section
Genrad 2.2.1
Mammography 2.2.2
2.2.1 Exposing the Genrad Cassette at a Genrad Modality

modality.
plate. facing up
Collimated
area
5175_c36_001.cdr
Figure 2

 12 mAs
 75 kVp
 1.3 m (51,2”) distance
 Large focus
(6) Turn the cassette 180° (black side still facing up).

Repair and Service
2.2.2 Exposing the Mammography Cassettes at a Mammography Modality
IMPORTANT:
The shading calibration should be made at a Genrad modality with Genrad cassettes.
Only use a Mammography modality for shading calibration, if the application type of the
installed system is "Mammography" exclusively. See also page 5.
(1) Select the modality according to

following preference list, if more
than one Mammography modality
is available on site:
1. Siemens Mammomat
2. GE DMR
3. Instrumentarium
(2) Using adhesive tape,
mount the Al-filter at the modality.
(3) Insert the Mammo cassette with
the black side facing up.
Figure 3

 200 mAs
 28 kVp
 Mo source / Mo filter
2.3 Scanning the Cassette
(1) On the NX workstation log-off the current user and log-in as "crservice".
(2) Open the Internet Explorer.
(3) Enter the digitizer IP address in the address window. See also NOTE below.

Repair and Service
NOTE:
If the digitizer IP address is not known, look it up in the NX configuration tool:
 Double-click the icon <Start NX Configurator> on the desktop.
 Select: Load active configuration
 Go to: Devices > Digitizer Configuration.
This page shows the digitizer IP address.
 Quit the NX Configurator (Close without saving any changes)
(4) Enter username and password (obtained during the classroom training).
(5) Select the service menu: <Shading Calibration>
(6) For CR 30-Xm only: Select

<Genrad X-Ray Modality
available> or
<Mammo X-Ray Modality
available only>
(7) Select: <Calibrate>
Figure 4
(8) Press <confirm> in the error

viewer, when the Service user
interface shows following
message: Please confirm at
system to continue.
Waiting for confirm ...
Figure 5

Repair and Service
(9) A screen with instructions is

displayed.
Enter the exposed cassette in the
digitizer.
Figure 6
(10) Wait until scannig is finished.

The message Processing
calibration Image is displayed,
followed by the shading calibration
curve. See Figure 7.
(11) For CR 30-Xm only: If a

Mammography cassette was used
for shading calibration:
Repeat the shading calibration with
the other available format. See
also NOTE next page.
Figure 7
IMPORTANT:
If a message pops up which indicates a failed shading calibration (e.g. “Underexposed
- too low pixel values …) refer to section 2.5 for possible remedies.

Repair and Service
NOTE:
When performing a shading calibration at CR 30-Xm, a display informs which
calibrations have been made already and which still have to be performed.
Following displays are possible:
# Display Meaning
1 Calibration not successful:
No new calibration line stored.
2 Calibration with Genrad cassette successfully

performed. New calibration line (valid for
Genrad cassette and Mammography
cassettes) stored.
3 Calibration with Mammography cassette

24 x 30 cm successfully performed.

18 x 24 cm successfully performed.

18 x 24 cm and 24 x 30 cm successfully
performed.
(12) Remove the cassette from the digitizer.

(13) Select menu <Logout> and follow the logout wizard.
(14) Close the browser.

Repair and Service
2.4 Verifying a successful Shading Calibration
Verification (1) Expose a flatfield on the largest available cassette. Use the same exposure
parameters like for the shading calibration.
(2) Identify and scan the image. Use following exam type:
For Genrad: System Diagnosis → Flatfield
For Mammography: System Diagnosis Mammo → Flatfield Mammo
IMPORTANT:
By selection of examination type "System diagnosis" the correct settings for
image processing of the flatfield are used.
Any other examination type may give a result which cannot be used to evaluate the
flatfield image.
(3) Print or archive the image.

(4) Check the image for homogeneity in slow scan and fast scan direction.
(5) Log-off user "crservice".
Evaluation:
 If the scanned image does not show any lines or stripes in fast scan or slow scan
direction or large area inhomogeneities no further action is required.
 If there are unacceptable effects in slow scan or fast scan direction, see chapter
3.3, Troubleshooting.
Result The shading calibration is finished.
2.5 Appendix: Possible Reasons for a failed Shading Calibration
There are following main reasons for a failed shading calibration:

 Particles in the optical path  Use the cleaning brush to clean the optical path.
 Contamination and/or any defects on the image plate  Clean the image plate
according to the cleaning procedure or use another image plate.
 Cassette wrong exposed (too high / low dose)  Check exposure parameters.
 Cassette not exposed on its entire area (wrong collimation)  Ensure the
cassette is entirely exposed.
 PMT exposed to intensive light before calibration (in this case PMT has lower
sensitivity)  wait until the PMT has back the normal sensitivity (time depends
on duration and brightness of the light exposure).

Repair and Service
3 Stall Calibration
Purpose The stall calibration determines the optimum motor current for stall detection:
The motor drives several times to its home and end position with different motor
currents. The mean value of these different motor currents is used as motor control
current, where the steps of the motor are in the specified, allowed range.
Use Case Perform a stall calibration in following cases:

 After replacement of following spare parts:
o Cassette Fixation Unit
o Cassette Fixing Motor (M1)
o Cassette Unlatch Assembly
o Drawer Unit
o Drawer Unit motor (M4)
o Roller Clamping Motor (M6)
o Toothed belt for the Drawer Motor (M4)
o Toothed belt for the Roller Clamping Motor (M6)
 After replacement of the Handling Control Board (as this has the motor
controllers built in)
REQUIRED TOOLS:
None
REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1 minute per stall calibration
(3) Enter the digitizer IP address in the address window.
(4) If the IP address is not known: Look it up in the Configuration Tool of the
NX workstation.
(6) Select the service menu: <Stall Calibration>

Repair and Service
(7) Select the required motor or select

CR 30-X Service
All Motors to calibrate all
relevant motors one after another. Stall Calibration
(8) Wait until the stall calibration is
All Motors
finished. See Figure 9 and
Figure 10 for example screens. Cassette Fixing Motor (M1)
(9) Select menu <Logout> and
Cassette Locker Motor (M17)
follow the logout wizard.
(10) Close the browser. Drawer Unit motor (M4)
Roller Clamping Motor (M6)
Figure 8
CR 30-X Service CR 30-X Service

Stall Calibration Stall Calibration
All Motors All Motors
Cassette Fixing Motor (M1) Cassette Fixing Motor (M1)
Cassette Locker Motor (M17) Cassette Locker Motor (M17)
Drawer Unit motor (M4) Drawer Unit motor (M4)
Roller Clamping Motor (M6) Roller Clamping Motor (M6)
Stall Calibration for ‘Cassette Stall Calibration Locker

Locker Motor (M17)’ is ongoing ... Stall Calibration finished: OK
iRun Locker UnlockIp= 49
Figure 9: Example screen Figure 10: Example screen
Result The stall calibration is successfully performed.
NOTE:
The stall calibration does not harm - it can be performed anytime. It is required however
only in the cases as described previous page.

Repair and Service
4 Cassette Opener Sensor Calibration
Purpose The cassette opener calibration determines the number of steps between "close" and
"open" position of the cassette opener motor.
Use Case Perform a Cassette Opener Sensor calibration after replacement of the Cassette
Opener Assembly (if the Cassette Opener Sensor is installed).
REQUIRED TOOLS:
None
REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 1 minute
(4) If the IP address is not known: Look it up in the Configuration Tool of the
NX workstation.
(6) Select the service menu: <Calibrate Cass. Opener Sensor>
(7) Select: <Start>

(8) Wait a few seconds until the
message is displayed: Cassette
Opener Sensor is
calibrated successfully
(9) Select menu <Logout> and
follow the logout wizard.
(10) Close the browser.
Figure 11
Result The Cassette Opener Sensor calibration is successfully performed.

Chapter 3.8
Imaging Services Software Releases and Patches
CR 30-Xm
Type 5179 / 100
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
This document describes the released software version with their features and
limitations.

1.1 02-2012 • Added information about CR 30-Xm.
• Added CIRM1102
Document Title
DD+DIS230.10E CR 30-Xm / CR 30-X 2nd Service Documentation,
Chapter 3.1 Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instruction

eq_03-8_release-patch_e_template_v08
Repair and Service
DD+DIS230.10E Software Releases and Patches
► Manufacturer
Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany
or its affiliates.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
IMPORTANT:
such services.
NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 1 CR 30-Xm Type 5179 / 100 Chapter 3.8 / Page 2 of 8

02-2012 CR 30-X 2nd Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 SOFTWARE FOR CR 30-XM TYPE 5179 / 100.......................................................................4

1.1 Software Release CIRM1102 ...................................................................................................4
1.1.1 Supported Functions.................................................................................................................4
1.1.2 Limitations .................................................................................................................................5
2 SOFTWARE FOR CR 30-X 2ND TYPE 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225 ......................................5
2.1 Software Release CIR_1013 ....................................................................................................5
2.1.2 Limitations .................................................................................................................................6
2.2 Software Release CIR_1102 ....................................................................................................6
2.2.2 Limitations .................................................................................................................................7
2.2.3 Resolved Problems since Software Version CIR_1013 ...........................................................7


Repair and Service
1 Software for CR 30-Xm Type 5179 / 100
IMPORTANT:
The Software CIRMXXXX is only applicable for CR 30-Xm. The Software adds
mammography functionalities to the digitizer and needs the hardware of the CR 30-Xm.
The software will not be accepted at CR 30-X 2nd.
1.1 Software Release CIRM1102
Type of new Software 1st release

Release Date 02/2012
Digitizer SNs CR 30-Xm Type 5179 / 100 as of SN 1000
Availability The software release CIRM1102 has been part of device
delivery and is also available on Agfa HealthCare Library:
<Computed Radiography Æ CR Digitizers Æ
CR 30-Xm / CR 30-X 2nd Æ Software>
Prerequisites Service PC
1.1.1 Supported Functions
The digitizer software controls the functions as defined in the specifications.
For supported functions refer to:

• CR 30-Xm / CR 30-X 2nd Service Documentation,
Chapter 3.1 “Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instruction”
• CR 30-Xm / CR 30-X 2nd Service Documentation, Chapter 3.2 “Tools”


Repair and Service
1.1.2 Limitations
NOTE:
• While the CR 30-Xm digitizer is in active clinical use (image plates are scanned),
logging in through telnet and redirecting the console to this telnet session is
strictly forbidden, as it might lead to an image loss.
• Remote SW installation is not supported.
2 Software for CR 30-X 2nd Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
IMPORTANT:
The Software CIR_XXXX is only applicable for CR 30-X 2nd. The Software supports
the GenRad functions of the digitizer and does not support any mammography
functions!
The software will not be accepted at CR 30-Xm.
2.1 Software Release CIR_1013
Type of new Software 1st release

Digitizer SNs As of SN 50.0000
Availability The software release CIR_1013 has been part of device
delivery and is also available on Agfa HealthCare Library:
Prerequisites Service PC


Repair and Service
The digitizer software controls the functions as defined in the specifications.
For supported functions refer to:

• CR 30-Xm / CR 30-X 2nd Service Documentation,
Chapter 3.1 “Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instruction”
• CR 30-Xm / CR 30-X 2nd Service Documentation, Chapter 3.2 “Tools”
2.1.2 Limitations
NOTE:
While the CR 30-X 2nd digitizer is in active clinical use (image plates are scanned),
logging in through telnet and redirecting the console to this telnet session is strictly
forbidden, as it might lead to an image loss.
2.2 Software Release CIR_1102
Type of new Software 2nd release

Digitizer SNs CR 30-X 2nd - Type 5175 / 200 as of SN 50037
CR 30-X 2nd - Type 5175 / 205 as of SN 80001
Availability The latest version of the Digitizer software
(approximately 8,82 MB) is available for download
in Agfa HealthCare Library:
Prerequisites None


Repair and Service
The digitizer software CIR_1102 supports following functions:

• New error detection and handling system with CIRXXX service codes
• Improved service functionality via Web-Interface
• New Info Counter structure
2.2.2 Limitations
NOTE:
While the CR 30-X 2nd digitizer is in active clinical use (image plates are scanned),
logging in through telnet and redirecting the console to this telnet session is strictly
forbidden, as it might lead to an image loss.
2.2.3 Resolved Problems since Software Version CIR_1013
• Improved movement of the drawer unit to prevent a detachment of the tray

magnets when the tray is pulled out of the cassette by the drawer.
• Implemented additional error message during selftest if cassette opener cannot
reach reference position.
• Removed service menu: <Configuration Æ Exchanged Components>
• Implemented test of relevant hardware components in following service menu:
<Analysis & Repair Æ Selftest of Device>
• Adapted messages during backup of data.
• Implemented information about user in the service menu:
<Reporting Æ Service activity log>
• Corrected message in following service menus:
o <Analysis & Repair Æ Diagnose Cycle>
o <Analysis & Repair Æ Endurance Run Cycle>
o <Preventive Maintenance Æ Maintenance Indicator>
• Adapted default values for MTBM (Mean Time Between Maintenance) and
MCBM (Mean Cycles Between Maintenance) in service menu:
<Configuration Æ Protection mechanism>


Repair and Service
• Improved info message in service menu <Device Info Æ Network Info> in case
<Ping Destination> has not been selected.
• Service Interface: Additional option to save backup onto PC
• Corrected syntax of the backup file.
• Date of installation can be confirmed by FSE / DSE.
• Controlled exit of the service mode implemented. Service tasks can now be
defined.
• Default port for configuration – Fast-preview adapted.
• Improved Info counter information for e.g. retry cycles, IP jams.
• Adapted service protection mechanism for CR 30-X 2nd.
• With exit of the service mode the digitizer gets released and the status LED
changes from red (Service Mode indication) to green.
• Implemented release info in Error Viewer via context menu.


Imaging Services Reference and Circuit Diagrams

CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
CR 30-Xm
Type 5179 / 100
This document contains:

• Reference diagrams for identification and location of assemblies inside the
machine including an alphanumeric reference list
• Diagrams of printed circuit boards, if necessary

Revision Date
Document Title
Not applicable

eq_04_diagrams_e_template_v08
DD+DIS230.10E Reference and Circuit Diagrams
► Manufacturer
Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany
or its affiliates.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
IMPORTANT:
such services.
NOTE:

LIST OF CONTENTS
1 REFERENCE DIAGRAMS .......................................................................................................5

1.1 Frame........................................................................................................................................5
1.2 Circuit Boards............................................................................................................................5
1.3 Stepper Motors .........................................................................................................................6
1.4 Sensors, Switches and Components........................................................................................6
1.5 Circuit Diagrams........................................................................................................................7
2 OVERVIEW OF COMPONENTS..............................................................................................8
2.1 Overview of Circuit Boards .......................................................................................................8
2.2 Overview of Stepper Motors .....................................................................................................9
2.3 Overview of other Components ..............................................................................................10
3 CABLE CONNECTION OF COMPONENTS ..........................................................................11

3.1 Frame......................................................................................................................................11
3.1.1 CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm - Safety Switch (S2) ......................................................................11
3.1.2 CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm - Flat Connector Strip (XK3)..........................................................12
3.1.3 CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm - Power Supply (B420) and Input Power (ST1) ............................13
3.2 Cassette Unit...........................................................................................................................14
3.2.1 CR 30-Xm - Handling Control Board (B419)...........................................................................14
3.2.2 CR 30-X 2nd - Handling Control Board (B419).......................................................................15
3.2.3 CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm - User Interface Board (B418).......................................................18
3.3 Scan Module ...........................................................................................................................19
3.3.1 CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm - Calibration Board (B412) ............................................................19
3.3.2 CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm - Optic Module (B317) with CMAM Adapter Board .......................20
3.4 Scanner Unit ...........................................................................................................................22
3.4.1 CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm - CPMM Board (B427)...................................................................22
3.4.2 CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm - CPMI Board (B410).....................................................................24
3.4.3 CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm - CPMI Power Distribution Board (B411) ......................................28
3.5 Erasure Unit ............................................................................................................................31
3.5.1 CR 30-Xm - Erasure LED Board (B423).................................................................................31

3.5.2 CR 30-X 2nd - Erasure LED Board (B423).............................................................................32
3.5.3 CR 30-Xm - Erasure LED Control Board (B424) ....................................................................33
3.5.4 CR 30-X 2nd - Erasure LED Control Board (B424) ................................................................35

1 Reference Diagrams
NOTE:
The reference lists include in an alphanumeric listing all electrical components with
reference to the corresponding circuit diagram for supporting the identification of all
components.
It is recommended to use a coloured printout of this document to support the better

visual understanding of the circuit diagrams.
1.1 Frame
Number Component Section

S2 Safety Switch 3.1.1
XK3 Flat Connector Strip 3.1.2
B420 Power Supply 3.1.3
ST1 Input Power 3.1.3
1.2 Circuit Boards

B410 CPMI Board 3.4.2
B411 CPMI Power Distribution Board 3.4.3
B412 Calibration Board 3.3.1
B418 User Interface Board 3.2.3
B419 Handling Control Board (Type 5179) 3.2.1
B419 Handling Control Board (Type 5175) 3.2.2
B423 Erasure LED Board (Type 5179) 3.5.1
B423 Erasure LED Board (Type 5175) 3.5.2
B424 Erasure LED Control Board (Type 5179) 3.5.3
B424 Erasure LED Control Board (Type 5175) 3.5.4
B427 CPMM Board 3.4.1

1.3 Stepper Motors

M1 Cassette Fixing Motor 2.2
M2 Slow Scan Motor
M3 Cassette Opener Motor
M4 Drawer Unit Motor
M5 Transport Roller Motor
M6 Roller Clamping Motor
M7 Slow Scan Lift Motor
M17 Cassette Unlatch Assembly
1.4 Sensors, Switches and Components

B1 RF-Tag Reader 2.3
B2 IP Sensor 3.2.1
B317 Optic Module with CMAM Adapter Board 3.3.2
B425 E-Label Gear Factor 2.3
B429 E-Label Cassette Fixation Unit (E-Label AMP) 2.3
B430 GS Adapter Board (Micro Match Adaptor) 3.2.1
B431 Cassette Opener Sensor (Type 5179) 2.3
S1 Cassette Edge Sensor 2.3
S3 Main Switch 2.3
S4 Overheat Protection 3.5.3
ST1 Autocal Sensor 3.4.1

1.5 Circuit Diagrams
Designation Section
Frame 3.1
Cassette Unit 3.2
Scan Module 3.3
Scanner Unit 3.4
Erasure Unit 3.5

2 Overview of Components
2.1 Overview of Circuit Boards
Figure 1

2.2 Overview of Stepper Motors
Cassette unlatch
assembly (M17)
Figure 2

2.3 Overview of other Components
Cass. Opener
Sensor
E-Label AMP
Figure 3

3 Cable Connection of Components
3.1 Frame
3.1.1 CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm - Safety Switch (S2)
8 = XK3 - Flat Connector Strip (see number 1c in Figure 5)

4 = XK3 - Flat Connector Strip (see number 2b in Figure 5)
3 = Power Supply (see number 2 in Figure 6, +24 V)
7 = Power Supply (see number 3 in Figure 6, +24 V)
8 4 3 7
Figure 4

3.1.2 CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm - Flat Connector Strip (XK3)
a = P3 - CPMI Power Distribution Board (Red cable, +24 V)

c d b = P3 - CPMI Power Distribution Board (Red cable, +24 V)
b e c = S2 - Safety Switch (see number 8 in Figure 4, Red cable)
1
a d = P5 - Handling Control Board (Red cable, +24 V)
f
e = P5 - Handling Control Board (Red cable, +24 V)
f = Not applicable
a = Not applicable
c d b = S2 - Safety Switch (see number 4 in Figure 4, Red cable)
b e
2 c = Not applicable
a d = Not applicable
f
e = P3 - Erasure LED Control Board (Orange cable, +24 V)
f = Not applicable
a = Not applicable
c d b = Power Supply (see number 4 in Figure 6, Black cable, GND)
b e
3 c = Not applicable
a d = Not applicable
f
e = P3 - Erasure LED Control Board (Black cable, GND)
f = Not applicable
4
3 a = Power Supply (see number 5 in Figure 6, Black cable, GND)
2 c d b = Not applicable
1 b e c = P5 - Handling Control Board (Black cable, GND)
4
a d = P3 - CPMI Power Distribution Board (Black cable, GND)
f
e = P3 - CPMI Power Distribution Board (Black cable, GND)
f = P5 - Handling Control Board (Black cable, GND)
Figure 5

3.1.3 CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm - Power Supply (B420) and Input Power (ST1)
Power Supply (B420) INPUT Power (ST1)
110-240VAC 50/60Hz
3 4
678
2 1
54 32
1 = PE - Ground Connection (Yellow - green cable) 1 = L(AC) S3 - Main switch (Black cable)
2 = N(AC) S3 - Main switch (Black cable)
2 = +24 V - S2 Safety switch (see number 3 in Figure 4, Red cable) 3 = PE - Gound Connection (Yellow - green cable)
3 = +24 V - S2 Safety switch (see number 7 in Figure 4, Red cable) 4 = Ethernet cable
4 = GND - XK3 Flat Connector Strip (see number 3b in Figure 5, Black cable)
5 = GND - XK3 Flat Connector Strip (see number 4a in Figure 5, Black cable)
6 = PE - Ground Connection Main cable (Yellow - green cable)

7 = N(AC) - S3 Main switch (Black cable)
8 = L(AC) - S3 Main switch (Black cable)
Figure 6

3.2 Cassette Unit
3.2.1 CR 30-Xm - Handling Control Board (B419)
Lift Ref Slow Slow E-Label

Pos Scan Scan Gear Factor
(B426) Lift Motor (B425)
Motor (M2) P2
P1 (M7) E-Label Erasure
User GS XK3 Cassette P1#23 P1 LED
Interface Adapter ST38 ST7 Flat Fixation CPMI RF-Tag Control IP
Board Board Connector Unit Board Reader Board Sensor
(B418) (B430) Strip (B429) (B410) (B1) (B424) (B2)
P17 P14 P11 P6 P5 P3 P1 P2 P16 P18
Cassette Opener Sensor (B431) P20
Cassette Opener Motor (M3) P10 P15 Cassette Edge Sensor (S1)
P9 Drawer Unit Motor (M4)

Roller Clamping Motor (M6) P12
P8 Cassette Unlatch Assembly (M17)

Transport Roller Motor (M5) P13 B419
P7 Cassette Fixing Motor (M1)
* Not conne cted

P19 BU1#3 ST1#1 P4
Test eLabel Bootload Log

and I/O Service* Debug* and
Debug Debug
Optional* Port*
Figure 7

3.2.2 CR 30-X 2nd - Handling Control Board (B419)
Lift Ref Slow Slow E-Label

Pos Scan Scan Gear Factor
(B426) Lift Motor (B425)
Motor (M2) P2
P1 (M7) E-Label Erasure
User GS XK3 Cassette P1#23 P1 LED
Interface Adapter ST38 ST7 Flat Fixation CPMI RF-Tag Control IP
Board Board Connector Unit Board Reader Board Sensor
(B418) (B430) Strip (B429) (B410) (B1) (B424) (B2)
P17 P14 P11 P6 P5 P3 P1 P2 P16 P18
Cassette Opener Motor (M3) P10 P15 Cassette Edge Sensor (S1)
P9 Drawer Unit Motor (M4)

Roller Clamping Motor (M6) P12
P8 Cassette Unlatch Assembly (M17)

Transport Roller Motor (M5) P13 B419
P7 Cassette Fixing Motor (M1)
* Not conne cted

P19 BU1#3 ST1#1 P4
Test eLabel Bootload Log

and I/O Service* Debug* and
Debug Debug
Optional* Port*
Figure 8

Plug Function Pins Supply Connector

P1 CAN Interface 10 CAN_ GND (Pin 2) Connection to P1#23 on CPMI Board (B410)
CAN_GND (Pin 5)
Shield_0R_GND (Pin 9)
P2 RF-Tag Interface 6 GND (Pin 3) Connection to P1 on RF-Tag Reader (B1)
+5 V (Pin 4)
P3 Interface for external E-Label 4 +5 V (Pin 2) Connection to E-Label Cassette Fixation Unit (B429) and
GND (Pin 3) E-Label Gear Factor (B425)
P4 Serial Log/Debug 10 +5 V (Pin 1) Serial Log & Debug Interface
GND (Pin 7)
P5 Power Supply 8 +24 V (Pin 1) Connection to XK3 Flat Connector Strip
+24 V (Pin 2)
+24 V (Pin 3)
+24 V (Pin 4)
GND (Pin 5)
GND (Pin 6)
GND (Pin 7)
GND (Pin 8)
P6 SlowScan SM0_A 4 +39 V Connection to Slow Scan Motor (M2)
P7 Fixer SM0_B 8 +39 V Connection to Cassette Fixer Motor (M1)
P8 Unlatch Assembly SM1_A 4 +24 V Connection to Cassette Unlatch Assembly (M17)
P9 Drawer SM1_B 4 +24 V Connection to Drawer Unit Motor (M4)
P10 Opener SM2_A 8 +24 V Connection to Cassette Opener Motor (M3)


P11 Lift SM2_B 4 +24 V Connection to Slow Scan Lift Motor (M7)
P12 Roller Clamp SM3 8 +24 V Connection to Roller Clamping Motor (M6)
P13 Roller Transport SM4 8 +24 V Connection to Transport Roller Motor (M5)
P14 Lift RefPos Light Barrier 4 GND (Pin 3) Connection to GS Adapter Board (B430) and Lift Ref Pos (B426)
+5 V (Pin 4)
P15 Cassette Edge Sensor (S1) 3 - Connection to Cassette Edge Sensor (S1)
P16 Erasure LED Control Board 8 GND (Pin 7) Connection to P2 on Erasure LED Control Board (B424)
P17 User Interface Board 10 +24 V (Pin 1) Connection to P1 on User Interface Board (B418)
+24 V (Pin 2)
GND (Pin 9)
GND (Pin 10)
P18 IP Sensor (B2) 4 +5 V (Pin 1) Connection to IP Sensor (B2)
GND (Pin 3)
+5 V (Pin 4)
P19 SM Log/Debug 10 +5 V (Pin 1) SM Log & Debug SPI exMem
GND (Pin 5)
P20 Cassette Opener Sensor 4 +5 V (Pin 4) Connection to ST1 on Cassette Opener Sensor (B431)
(CR 30-Xm only) GND (Pin 3)
BU1#3 E-Label I/O Service 4 +5 V (Pin 2) Onboard E-Label Interface connector part of E-Label Module
GND (Pin 3)
ST1#1 Bootload/Debug 10 DGND (Pin 7) Bootload/Debug Interface connector part of M32-Module

3.2.3 CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm - User Interface Board (B418)
P17
Handling
Control
Board
P1
Figure 9

P1 CHC Interface 10 +24 V (Pin 1) Connection to P17 on Handling Control Board (B419)
+24 V (Pin 2)
GND (Pin 8)
GND (Pin 9)
GND (Pin 10)

3.3 Scan Module
3.3.1 CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm - Calibration Board (B412)
P1
CMAM
Adapter
Board
P1
B412
Figure 10

P1 CAL Interface 12 +12 V (Pin 1) Connection to P1 on CMAM Adapter Board
GND (Pin 2)
-12 V (Pin 3)

3.3.2 CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm - Optic Module (B317) with CMAM Adapter Board
P1 P1 Calibration Board (B412)

B317
P4 P1#22 CPMI Board (B410)
P2 Optic Module (B317)
P3
P2#22
CPMI
Board
(B410)
Figure 11


P1 CAL Interface 12 +12 V (Pin 1) Connection to P1 on Calibration Board (B412)
GND (Pin 2)
-12 V (Pin 3)
P2 Interface to Optic Module 25 GND_POL (Pin 1) Connection to Optic Module (B317)
+24 V (Pin 2)
GND (Pin 11)
GND ( Pin 12)
+12 V (Pin 13)
GND_POL (Pin 14)
-12 V (Pin 24)
GND (Pin 25)
P3 Interface to CPMI Board 15 +12 V (Pin1) Connection to P2#22 on CPMI Board (B410)
-12 V (Pin 2)
GND (Pin 9)
P4 Interface to CPMI Board 15 GND_POL (Pin 1) Connection to P1#22 on CPMI Board (B410)
GND (Pin 7)
GND (Pin 8)
+24 V_POL (Pin 9)
+12 V (Pin 14)
-12 V (Pin 15)

3.4 Scanner Unit
3.4.1 CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm - CPMM Board (B427)
P1#19
CPMI
Board
(B410)
BU1#1 ST1
External Autocal
P1 E-Label Sensor
P4 P2 CPMM Tube Board (B422)
P2 P3 CPMM Tube Board (B422)
Figure 12


P1 Interface to CPMI Board 17 GND (Pin 1) Connection to P1#19 on CPMI Board (B410)
-10 V (Pin 2)
DGND (Pin 3)
+5 V (Pin 4)
GND (Pin 8)
+20 V (Pin 9)
P2 Interconnection of CPMM tube 10 HSP Dy6 high voltage, Connection to P3 on CPMM Tube Board
electronics max. 1000 V, 1 mA (Pin 2) (B422)
HSP2 Dy2, Dy3 and Dy4 HV voltage,

max. 800 V, 2 mA (Pin 6)
HSP1 Dy5 high voltage,

max. 320 V, 2 mA (Pin 10)
P4 Interconnection of CPMM main 10 -5 V_INT (Pin 1) Connection to P2 on CPMM Tube Board
electronics +5 V_INT (Pin 2) (B422)
+15 V_INT (Pin 3)
GND Analog (Pin 4)
+20 V_INT (Pin 5)
GND Analog (Pin 6, 7, 9, 10)
BU1#1 External E-Label - - External E-Label
ST1 Connection to Autocal Sensor 4 - Connection to Autocal Sensor

3.4.2 CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm - CPMI Board (B410)
P1 Compact
CPMM Flash Display External
Main Board Card Debug* E-Label*
P1#19 P1#3 P1#20 BU1#21
P1#22 P4 CMAM Adapter Board
P5 CPMI Power Distribution Board (B411) P1#17

(Bottom Side)
P2#22 P3 CMAM Adapter Board
P1#23 P1 Handling Control Board (B419)
P1#5 USB
JTAG* P23
B410 P1#4 Ethernet
P33 P1#2
RS232 Connector
* Not conne cted Debug* to Boot Board*
Figure 13


P1#2 Boot board 64 - Connection to Boot-Flash connector
P1#3 CF connectivity - - Compact Flash Card
P1#4 Ethernet Interface - - Ethernet connection
P1#5 USB Interface - - USB connection
P1#19 CPMM Interface 15 GND Analog (Pin 1) Connection to P1 on CPMM Main Board
-10 V (Pin 2)
GND Digital (Pin 3)
+5 VD (Pin 4)
GND Analog (Pin 8)
+ 20 V (Pin 9)
GND Digital (Pin 11)
P1#20 Debug - - Display Debug
P1#22 Optics Interface 15 GND Polygon (Pin 1) Connection to P4 on CMAM Adapter Board
GND LD Modulator (Pin 7)
GND LD Modulator (Pin 8)
+24 V (Pin 9)
+12 V (Pin 14)
-12 V (Pin 15)
P1#23 CAN Interface 10 CAN Vcc Optional 5...15 V (Pin 1) Connection to P1 on Handling Control Board
CAN GND (Pin 3) (B419)
CAN GND (Pin 6)
CAN Vcc 5...15 V (Pin 9)


P2#22 CAL Interface 15 +12 V (Pin1) Connection to P3 on CMAM Adapter Board
-12 V (Pin 2)
GND (Pin 9)
P23 JTAG - - JTAG
P33 Debug - - RS232 Debug
P1#17 Power Interface 50 GND_Polygon (Pin 1) Connection to P5 on CPMI Power
+27.2 V Polygon (Pin 2) Distribution Board (B411)
GND_LD Modulator (Pin 3)
+12 V_LD Modulator (Pin 4)
-12 V LD Modulator (Pin 6)
+12 V CAL-Board (Pin 7)
GND CAL-Board (Pin 9)
-12 V CAL-Board (Pin 10)
Sense DGND (Pin 12)
GND PMT-Board (Pin 13)
+20 V PMT-Board (Pin 14)
-10 V PMT-Board (Pin 16)
GND Analog (Pin 19)
+8 V Analog (Pin 20)
+12 V CAN Bus (Pin 24)


P1#17 Power Interface 50 GND CAN Bus (Pin 25) Connection to P5 on CPMI Power
+12 V HD (Pin 28) Distribution
GND HD (Pin 29) Board (B411)
+5 V (Pin 32)
GND (Pin 33)
+5 V (Pin 34)
GND (Pin 35)
+5 V (Pin 36)
GND (Pin 37)
+5 V (Pin 38)
GND (Pin 39)
+5 V (Pin 40)
GND (Pin 41)
+5 V (Pin 42)
GND (Pin 43)
+5 V (Pin 44)
GND (Pin 45)
Sense_5 V (Pin 46)
GND (Pin 47)
+5 V (Pin 48)
GND (Pin 49)
+5 V (50)
BU1#21 External E-Label - - External E-Label

3.4.3 CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm - CPMI Power Distribution Board (B411)
P3 XK3 Flat Connector Strip

B411
P5
P1#17
CPMI
Board
(B410)
Figure 14


+24 V (Pin 2)
+24 V (Pin 3)
+24 V (Pin 4)
GND (Pin 5-8)
P5 CPMI Interface 50 GND (Pin 1) Connection to P1#17 on CPMI Board (B410)
+24 V Polygon Motor (Pin 2)
GND (Pin 3)
+12 V LD_Modulator (Pin 4)
-12 V LD_Modulator (Pin 6)
+12 V Calibration (Pin 7)
GND (Pin 9)
-12 V Calibration (Pin 10)
GND (Pin 12)
GND (Pin 13)
+20 V PMT (Pin 14)
-10 V PMT (Pin 16)
GND (Pin 19)
+8 V Analog Circuit (Pin 20)
CAN +12 V (Pin 24)
GND (Pin 25)
GND (Pin 29)
5 V Power Supply for 1.5 V Converter (Pin 32)
GND (Pin 33)


P5 CPMI Interface 50 5 V Power Supply for 1.5 V Converter (Pin 34) Connection to P1#17 on CPMI Board (B410)
GND (Pin 35)
GND (Pin 37)
GND (Pin 39)
GND (Pin 41)
GND (Pin 43)
GND (Pin 45)
5 V Power Supply Digital Sense (Pin 46)
GND (Pin 47)
5 V Power Supply Digital Circuit (Pin 48)
GND (Pin 49)
5 V Power Supply Digital Circuit (Pin 50)

3.5 Erasure Unit
3.5.1 CR 30-Xm - Erasure LED Board (B423)
P5
Erasure LED
Control Board
(B424)
P1
Figure 15

P1 Erasure Interface 12 - Connection to P5 on Erasure LED Control Board (B424)

3.5.2 CR 30-X 2nd - Erasure LED Board (B423)
P1 Erasure LED Control Board (B424) P1
B423
Figure 16

P1 Erasure Interface 8 - Connection to P1 on Erasure LED Control Board (B424)

3.5.3 CR 30-Xm - Erasure LED Control Board (B424)
P1 P16
Erasure Handling
LED Board Control Board
(B423) (B419)
XK3 Flat
Connector
P2 Strip
P5
P3
B424
P4
Overheat
Protection
(S4)
Figure 17


P2 CAL Interface 8 GND (Pin 6) Connection to P16 on Handling Control Board (B419)
GND (Pin 7)
Supply Voltage / 10 (Pin 8)
+24 V (Pin 2)
GND (Pin 3)
GND (Pin 4)
P4 Overheat Protection (S4) 2 IN (Pin 1) Overheat Protection (S4)
OUT (Pin 2)
P5 Erasure Interface 12 - Connection to P1 on Erasure LED Board (B423)

3.5.4 CR 30-X 2nd - Erasure LED Control Board (B424)
Overheat
Protection
(S4)
P4
XK3 Flat Connector Strip P3 B424

P1 P1 Erasure LED Board (B423)
P16 Handling Control Board (B419) P2
Figure 18


P1 Erasure Interface 8 - Connection to P1 on Erasure LED Board (B423)
P2 CAL Interface 8 GND (Pin 6) Connection to P16 on Handling Control Board (B419)
GND (Pin 7)
Supply Voltage / 10 (Pin 8)
P3 Power Supply 4 GND (Pin 1) Connection to XK3 Flat Connector Strip
GND (Pin 2)
+24 V (Pin 3)
+24 V (Pin 4)
P4 Overheat Protection (S4) 2 IN (Pin 1) Overheat Protection (S4)
OUT (Pin 2)

Spare Parts List
Document No: DD+DIS247.10M

CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
CR 30-Xm
Type 5179 / 100
Edition 1, Revision 1 Document Node ID: 30879825

02-2012 Printed in Germany spare_parts_e_template_v11
DD+DIS247.10M Spare Parts List
Manufacturer
Agfa HealthCare N.V
Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany
AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa HealthCare N.V., Belgium,
or its affiliates.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
WARNING:
Hazards may be introduced because of component failure or improper

operation.
INSTRUCTION:
• Replace defective parts with Agfa HealthCare original spare parts.
• Use only tools and measuring instruments which are suitable for the procedure.
• Only approved Agfa HealthCare accessories must be used. For a list of
compatible accessories contact your local Agfa HealthCare organization or
www.agfa.com.
NOTE:
To verify the latest version of a chapter of the Service Manuals refer to the "Checklist
for Completeness" in the Agfa HealthCare Library.

Edition 1, Revision 1 CR 30-X 2nd, Type 5175/200/205/220/225 Chapter 5 / Page 2 of 22

02-2012 CR 30-Xm, Type 5179/100 Agfa Company Confidential
Document History
Edition, Release Changes compared to previous Version 1.0
Revision Date
1.1 02-2012 Added information about CR 30-Xm
DISCLAIMER:
Actual delivered spare parts may differ (in appearance) from the images shown and/or
ordered spare parts.
The codes of the ordered spare parts can vary from the code of the delivered spare parts.
Agfa HealthCare warrants that the delivered spare parts have at least the same functionalities.
Agfa HealthCare reserves the right to deliver compatible or alternative spare parts.
Prices may differ from the original order as these spare parts will be invoiced at current prices.
NOTE:
Repaired Spare Parts are indicated with Prefix RF+.
Repaired Spare Parts may differ in lifetime.
NOTE:
Recycling of the electronic and electrical waste equipment will ensure safety of the human
health and the environment.
For information about electronic and electrical waste equipment disposal, recovery and
collection points, please contact your local waste disposal service or the producer / distributor
of this equipment.
If your equipment contains removable batteries or accumulators please dispose of these
separately according to local regulations.
Contact
Spare Parts ordering Europe: Orderprocessing-europe@matrium.net
Overseas: Orderprocessing-overseas@matrium.net
Spare Parts returns Worldwide: Returns@matrium.net


Contents
Verkleidung
CR MD 4.0 T Kassette Cover
Cassette CR MD 4.0 T Revêtement
Cassette CR MD 4.0 T Pages 6 - 7
Pages 18 - 19
Slow-Scan Einheit
Slow-Scan Unit
Unite Slow-Scan
CR MM 3.0 Kassette Pages 12 - 15
Cassette CR MM 3.0
Cassette CR MM 3.0
Pages 20 - 21
Transporteinheit
Tranport Unit
Module de Transport
Pages 10 - 11
Schublade
Input Tray
bac film
Pages 8 - 9


How to navigate the Spare Parts List online with the

Acrobat Reader
(1) Open Bookmarks.
(2) Click on "CONTENTS".
(3) See overview of the modules.

(4) Click on requested module.
(5) Appropriate page opens.
(6) Click on green arrow to

navigate back to the overview
of the modules.


01
02
07
09 06
05
03
08
04
5175_200_chap05_01_m.cdr
COVER


Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr. Benennung
Item no. Part No. Description
Pos. no. Nr. de Ref. Denomination
1 CM+6030610 VERKLEIDUNG OBEN GRAU (TYPE 5175/220/225)
TOP COVER GREY (TYPE 5175/220/225)
CAPOT EN HAUT GRISE (TYPE 5175/220/225) CR 30-X 2nd (WHITE)
1 CM+9517815250 VERKLEIDUNG OBEN (TYPE 5175/200/205, 5179/100)
TOP COVER (TYPE 5175/200/205, 5179/100)
CAPOT EN HAUT (TYPE 5175/200/205, 5179/100)
2 CM+6018180 SEITE LINKS, LACKIERT
LEFT COVER
RÊVETEMENT GAUCHE
3 CM+9517515041 SEITE RECHTS, LACKIERT
RIGHT COVER
RÊVETEMENT DROITE
4 CM+6037500 FRONTABDECKUNG (TYPE 5175/205)
FRONT COVER (TYPE 5175/205)
CAPOT AVANT (TYPE 5175/205)
4 CM+6030600 FRONTABDECKUNG GRAU (TYPE 5175/220/225)
FRONT COVER GREY (TYPE 5175/220/225)
CAPOT AVANT GRISE (TYPE 5175/220/225) CR 30-X 2nd (WHITE)
4 CM+9517815150 FRONTABDECKUNG (TYPE 5175/200)
FRONT COVER (TYPE 5175/200)
CAPOT AVANT (TYPE 5175/200)
4 CM+6041910 FRONTABDECKUNG CR 30-XM (TYPE 5179/100)
FRONT COVER CR 30-XM (TYPE 5179/100) CR 30-Xm
CAPOT AVANT CR 30-XM (TYPE 5179/100)
5 CM+9517515800 USER INTERFACE BOARD
USER INTERFACE BOARD
USER INTERFACE BOARD
6 CM+9517840100 SICHERHEITSSCHALTER
SAFETY SWITCH
INTERRUPTEUR DE SÉCURITÉ
7 CM+9048614201 NETZTEIL
POWER SUPPLY
ALIMENTATION AVEC INTERRUPTEUR
8 CM+9517885850 EIN-AUSSCHALTER MIT KABELBAUM
MAIN SWITCH WITH WIRE HARNESS
INTERRUPTEUR AVEC HARNAIS DE CÂBLE
9 CM+9047711120 USB KABEL
USB CABLE
CABLE USB
= Assembly
* = Spare Part standardly is not kept in stock, extended delivery time is possible.
99 = Spare Part is not shown in Exploded Views.
RF+: Repaired Spare Parts
COVER


05 01
07 (M3)
06 03
09 02
10
08
04
11
12 (M1)
13 (M17)
5175_200_chap05_02_m.cdr
INPUT TRAY


1 CM+9517514100 REINIGUNGSBÜSTE (BUCHSE Ø4MM)
CLEANING BRUSH (BUSHING Ø4MM)
BROSSE DE NETTOYAGE (DOUILLE Ø4MM)
2 CM+9517852000 KASSETTENÖFFNER KOMPLETT (TYPE 5175/200/205/220/225)
CASSETTE OPENER ASSEMBLY (TYPE 5175/200/205/220/225)
SYSTÈME D'OUVERTURE CASSETTE (TYPE 5175/200/205/220/225)
2 CM+6042090 KASSETTENÖFFNER KOMPLETT (TYPE 5179/100)
CASSETTE OPENER ASSEMBLY (TYPE 5179/100) CR 30-Xm
SYSTÈME D'OUVERTURE CASSETTE (TYPE 5179/100)
3 CM+9517886101 TAG READER KABEL
TAG READER CABLE
CABLE TAG READER
4 CM+6044200 RF TAG READER
RF TAG READER
DISPOSITIF DE LECTURE DES ÉTIQUETTES
5 CM+6042850 LICHTSCHRANKE KASSETTENÖFFNER (TYPE 5179/100)
CASSETTE OPENER SENSOR (TYPE 5179/100)
SENSOR SYSTÈME D'OUVERTURE CASSETTE (TYPE 5179/100) CR 30-Xm
6 CM+9517840050 ZAHNRIEMEN SET
SET OF TOOTHED BELTS
COURROIE CRANTÉE
7 CM+9517885300 MOTOR M3 (KASSETTENÖFFNER)
MOTOR M3 (CASSETTE OPENER)
MOTEUR M3 (SYSTÈME D'OUVERTURE CASSETTE)
8 CM+6042860 HANDLING CONTROL BOARD (TYPE 5179/100)
HANDLING CONTROL BOARD (TYPE 5179/100)
CARTE CONTRÔLE DÉROULEMENT (TYPE 5179/100)
CR 30-Xm
8 CM+9517845100 HANDLING CONTROL BOARD (TYPE 5175/200/205/220/225)
HANDLING CONTROL BOARD (TYPE 5175/200/205/220/225)
CARTE CONTRÔLE DÉROULEMENT (TYPE 5175/200/205/220/225)
9 CM+9517886300 USER INTERFACE KABEL
USER INTERFACE CABLE
CABLE USER INTERFACE
10 CM+9517886200 IP SENSOR KABEL
IP SENSOR CABLE
CABLE IP SENSOR
11 CM+9517858000 KASSETTENKLEMMER
CASSETTE FIXATION UNIT
SERRAGE DE CASSETTES
12 CM+9517858100 MOTOR M1 (KASSETTENKLEMMER)
MOTOR M1 (CASSETTE FIXING)
MOTEUR M1 (SERRAGE DE CASSETTES)
13 CM+9517856000 KASSETTENENTRIEGLER
CASSETTE UNLATCH ASSEMBLY
CASSETTE DEVERROUILLAGE
= Assembly
INPUT TRAY


01
02
08*
09
07 (M5)
08*
04
11
04
10
05 (M6)
04
06 (M4)
03
5175_200_chap05_03_m.cdr
TRANSPORT UNIT


1 CM+9517836000 LÖSCHEINHEIT (TYPE 5175/200/205/220/225)
ERASURE UNIT (TYPE 5175/200/205/220/225)
UNITE D'EFFACEMENT (TYPE 5175/200/205/220/225)
1 CM+6041101 LÖSCHEINHEIT CR 30-XM (TYPE 5179/100)
ERASURE UNIT CR 30-XM (TYPE 5179/100)
UNITE D'EFFACEMENT CR 30-XM (TYPE 5179/100)
CR 30-Xm
2 CM+9517860130 FÜHRUNGSBLECH LÖSCHEINHEIT
GUIDE PLATE ERASURE UNIT
TÔLE CONDUCTRICE D'EFFACEMENT
3 CM+9949969500 SENSOR IR-REFLEX
ROLLER IP SENSOR
PHOTOCELLULE DE REFLEXION
4 CM+9517840050 ZAHNRIEMEN SET
SET OF TOOTHED BELTS
COURROIE CRANTÉE
5 CM+9517860250 MOTOR M6 (WALZENKLEMMER)
MOTOR M6 (ROLLER CLAMPING)
MOTEUR M6 (SERRAGE DE ROULEAUX)
6 CM+9517860550 MOTOR M4 (TRANSPORTSCHLITTEN)
MOTOR M4 (DRAWER UNIT)
MOTEUR M4 (CHARIOT DE TRANSPORT)
7 CM+9517845190 MOTOR M5 (TRANSPORTWALZEN)
MOTOR M5 (TRANSPORT ROLLER)
MOTEUR M5 (ROULEAUX DE TRANSPORT)
8 CM+9517863250 * SET EINGABEROLLEN
SET INPUT ROLLERS
SET INPUT ROLLERS
9 CM+9517864001 WALZENSTUHL OBEN
UPPER ROLLER ASSEMBLY
PAIRE DE ROULEAUX
10 CM+9517867001 TRANSPORTSCHLITTEN
DRAWER UNIT
CHARIOT DE TRANSPORT
11 CM+9517867650 MAGNET, GEKLEBT
SET PERMAMENT MAGNET
FIXATION, COLLÉ
= Assembly
TRANSPORT UNIT


01
02
03
04
06
05
07 (M2)
5175_200_chap05_04_m.cdr
SLOW-SCAN UNIT


1 CM+9517827501 OPTIKBAUGRUPPE (TYPE 5175/200/205/220/225)
OPTIC MODULE (TYPE 5175/200/205/220/225)
ENSEMBLE OPTIQUE (TYPE 5175/200/205/220/225)
1 CM+6041080 OPTIKBAUGRUPPE CR 30-XM (TYPE 5179/100)
OPTIC MODULE CR 30-XM (TYPE 5179/100)
ENSEMBLE OPTIQUE CR 30-XM (TYPE 5179/100)
CR 30-Xm
2 CM+9517845500 CPMI POWER INTEGRATION BOARD
CPMI POWER INTEGRATION BOARD
CPMI POWER INTEGRATION BOARD
3 CM+9517098850 SPEICHERKARTE
SOLID STATE DISK
SOLID STATE DISK
4 CM+9517821700 CPMI BOARD
CPMI BOARD
BOARD CPMI
5 CM+6024690 ABHEBEMECHANIK LINKS (TYPE 5175/200/205/220/225)
ROLLER LIFT ASSEMBLY LEFT (TYPE 5175/200/205/220/225)
DISPOSITIF DE LEVAGE A GAUCHE (TYPE 5175/200/205/220/225)
5 CM+6048590 ABHEBEMECHANIK LINKS CR 30-XM (TYPE 5179/100)
ROLLER LIFT ASSEMBLY LEFT CR30-XM (TYPE 5179/100)
ROLLER LIFT ASSEMBLY LEFT CR30-XM (TYPE 5179/100)
CR 30-Xm
6 CM+9517825000 GETRIEBE MIT MOTOR UND TRANSPORT-WALZEN (TYPE 5175/200/205/220/225)
GEAR BOX WITH MOTOR AND SCAN ROLLERS (TYPE 5175/200/205/220/225)
ENGRENAGE (TYPE 5175/200/205/220/225)
6 CM+6042320 GETRIEBE MIT MOTOR UND TRANSPORT-WALZEN CR 30-XM (TYPE 5179/100)
GEAR BOX WITH MOTOR AND SCAN ROLLERS CR 30-XM (TYPE 5179/100)
ENGRENAGE CR 30-XM (TYPE 5179/100)
CR 30-Xm
7 CM+9517825800 MOTOR M2 (SLOW SCAN)
MOTOR M2 (SLOW SCAN)
MOTEUR M2 (SLOW SCAN)
= Assembly
SLOW-SCAN UNIT


01
02
03
07
04*
06
05
5175_200_chap05_05_m.cdr
SLOW-SCAN UNIT


1 CM+6041070 PMT DETECTOR MIT LICHTSAMMLER CR 30-XM (TYPE 5179/100)
PMT WITH LIGHT COLLECTOR CR 30-XM (TYPE 5179/100)
DETECTEUR PMT CR 30-XM (TYPE 5179/100)
CR 30-Xm
1 CM+9517831403 PMT DETECTOR MIT LICHTSAMMLER (TYPE 5175/200/205/220/225)
PMT WITH LIGHT COLLECTOR (TYPE 5175/200/205/220/225)
DETECTEUR PMT (TYPE 5175/200/205/220/225)
2 CM+6041060 SAMMELSPIEGEL MONTIERT CR 30-XM (TYPE 5179/100)
REFLECTOR WITH BRUSH CR 30-XM (TYPE 5179/100)
REFLECTEUR AVEC BROSSE CR 30-XM (TYPE 5179/100)
CR 30-Xm
2 CM+9517830202 REFLEKTOR MIT BÜRSTE (TYPE 5175/200/205/220/225)
REFLECTOR WITH BRUSH (TYPE 5175/200/205/220/225)
REFLECTEUR AVEC BROSSE (TYPE 5175/200/205/220/225)
3 CM+9517826500 SCHAUMWALZE VOLLSTÄNDIG (TYPE 5175/200/205/220/225)
UPPER SCAN ROLLERS (TYPE 5175/200/205/220/225)
UPPER SCAN ROLLERS (TYPE 5175/200/205/220/225)
3 CM+6049090 SCHAUMWALZE VOLLST. CR30-XM (TYPE 5179/100)
UPPER SCAN ROLLERS CR30-XM (TYPE 5179/100)
UPPER SCAN ROLLERS CR30-XM (TYPE 5179/100) CR 30-Xm
4 CM+9517824130 * GLASSCHEIBE IM SCANNER
PANE IN SCANNER
VITRE DE SCANNER
5 CM+6048600 ABHEBEMECHANIK RECHTS CR 30-XM (TYPE 5179/100)
ROLLER LIFT ASSEMBLY RIGHT CR 30-XM (TYPE 5179/100)
ROLLER LIFT ASSEMBLY RIGHT CR 30-XM (TYPE 5179/100)
CR 30-Xm
5 CM+6024710 ABHEBEMECHANIK RECHTS (TYPE 5175/200/205/220/225)
ROLLER LIFT ASSEMBLY RIGHT (TYPE 5175/200/205/220/225)
DISPOSITIF DE LEVAGE A DROITE (TYPE 5175/200/205/220/225)
6 CM+9517824700 CALIBRATION BOARD
CALIBRATION BOARD
CALIBRATION BOARD
7 CM+9517824840 LEITBLECH ÜBERGABE
GUIDE PLATE SCANNER INPUT
GUIDE PLATE SCANNER INPUT
= Assembly
SLOW-SCAN UNIT


01 02
06
03 04 05
07
08 09
10
11
5175_200_chap05_06_m.cdr
SMALL PARTS AND TOOLS


1 CM+6049480 LIMIT PATTERNS FOR CR30-XM
LIMIT PATTERNS FOR CR30-XM
LIMIT PATTERNS FOR CR30-XM
CR 30-Xm
1 CM+9517591600 CR30 LIMIT PATTERN CD1.0
CR30 LIMIT PATTERN CD1.0
CR30 LIMIT PATTERN CD1.0
2 CM+6027470 ADAPTERPLATTE CR 30-X 2ND
ADAPTOR BASE PLATE CR 30-X 2ND
PLATE ADAPTEUR CR 30-X 2ND
3 CM+6037431 USB FLASH DRIVE WITH SOFTWARE, VERSION CIR_1102
USB FLASH DRIVE WITH SOFTWARE, VERSION CIR_1102
USB FLASH DRIVE WITH SOFTWARE, VERSION CIR_1102
4 CM+6045180 USB FLASH DRIVE SOFTWARE, VERSION CIRM1102
USB FLASH DRIVE SOFTWARE, VERSION CIRM1102
USB FLASH DRIVE SOFTWARE, VERSION CIRM1102
CR 30-Xm
5 CM+9042663090 VERRIEGELUNGSWERKZEUG
SERVICE KEY
SERVICE KEY
6 CM+9515510152 CU-FILTER VERPACKT
CU FILTER PACKED
FILTER CU EMBALLE
7 CM+9999908300 ANTI-STATIC WRIST STRAP
ANTI-STATIC WRIST STRAP
ANTI-STATIC WRIST STRAP
8 10+9999911970 CR PHOSPHOR PLATE CLEANER (FOR CR MD4.0T ONLY)
CR PHOSPHOR PLATE CLEANER (FOR CR MD4.0T ONLY)
CR PHOSPHOR PLATE CLEANER (FOR CR MD4.0T ONLY)
9 CM+9999992470 ISOFLEX TOPAS NB52 (50 ML)
ISOFLEX TOPAS NB52 (50 ML)
ISOFLEX TOPAS NB52 (50 ML)
10 CM+9957999040 MAGNIFYING GLASS 8X
MAGNIFYING GLASS 8X
MAGNIFYING GLASS 8X
11 CM+9514810900 ALU FILTER VERPACKT
ALUMINIUN FILTER PACKED
ALUMINIUN FILTER PACKED
99 10+9999912730 POLYNIT WIPES
POLYNIT WIPES
POLYNIT WIPES
= Assembly
SMALL PARTS AND TOOLS


REAR SIDE
06* - 11*
01* - 05*
5175_200_CHAP05_07_m.CDR
CASSETTE CR MD 4.0 T


1 CM+9518052002 * SCHUBLADE + IP 35X43
TRAY + IP 35X43
TIROIR + IP 35X43
2 CM+9518152001 * SCHUBLADE + IP 35X35
TRAY + IP 35X35
TIROIR + IP 35X35
3 CM+9518252002 * SCHUBLADE + IP 24X30
TRAY + IP 24X30
TIROIR + IP 24X30
4 CM+9518352002 * SCHUBLADE + IP 18X24
TRAY + IP 18X24
TIROIR + IP 18X24
5 CM+9518452002 * SCHUBLADE + IP 15X30
TRAY + IP 15X30
TIROIR + IP 15X30
6 CM+9518053002 * LEERKASSETTE 35X43
BLANK CASSETTE 35X43
CASSETTE BLANC 35X43
11 CM+9518012201 * CR-30 FLFS KASSETTE
CR-30 FLFS CASSETTE
CASSETTE CR-30 FLFS
= Assembly
CASSETTE CR MD 4.0 T


01* - 02*
REAR SIDE
03* - 04*
05* - 06*
5175_200_CHAP05_08_m.CDR
CASSETTE CR MM3.0


1 CM+6049140 * CR MM3.0T MAMMO SET 18X24 CM
CR MM3.0T MAMMO SET 18X24 CM
2 CM+6049150 * CR MM3.0T MAMMO SET 24X30 CM
3 CM+6048100 * CR MM3.0T MAMMO CASSETTE 18X24 CM
CR MM3.0T MAMMO CASSETTE 18X24 CM
4 CM+6048120 * CR MM3.0T MAMMO CASSETTE 24X30 CM CR 30-Xm
5 CM+6049160 * CR MM3.0T MAMMO PLATE 18X24 CM
CR MM3.0T MAMMO PLATE 18X24 CM
6 CM+6049170 * CR MM3.0T MAMMO PLATE 24X30 CM
= Assembly
CASSETTE CR MM3.0


Type Overview
This spare parts list is valid for the following machine type(s):
Device Name Type Number Specification

CR 30-X 2/60 Digitizer 5175/0200 5QTR4
CR 30-X 2/35 Digitizer 5175/0205 5RVQK
CR White 2/60 Digitizer 5175/0220 5RVRM
CR White 2/35 Digitizer 5175/0225 5RVSO
CR 30-Xm 5179/0100 5SDMH
Accessory Overview
Following accesssories are separately available:
Accessory Order Number

TABLE FOR CR30-X EWRP3
ALL IN ONE CART E2M3H


Imaging Services Maintenance
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
CR 30-Xm
Type 5179 / 100
This document contains all routines and tests to be carried out during maintenance.
It describes all must maintenance periodical steps in chronological suitable order.

Document Title
Chapter 3.5 - Replacements / Repair Procedures
Chapter 3.6 - Adjustments and Calibrations
This document is separately available. Order number: DD+DIS231.10E
eq_09_maintenance_e_template_v08
DD+DIS231.10E Maintenance
► Manufacturer
Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany
or its affiliates.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
IMPORTANT:
such services.
NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 1 CR 30-X 2nd Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225 Chapter 9 / Page 2 of 31
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 GENERAL INFORMATION ON PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE .............................................5

1.1 Maintenance Frequency ...........................................................................................................5
1.2 Required Time...........................................................................................................................5
1.3 Required Documents ................................................................................................................5
1.4 Required Software ....................................................................................................................5
1.5 Required Tools..........................................................................................................................6
1.6 Required Cleaning Material ......................................................................................................7
1.7 Required Lubrication Material ...................................................................................................7
2 DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................................8
2.1 Questioning of the Customer ....................................................................................................8
2.2 Analyzing the Info Counter........................................................................................................8
2.3 Documenting the Technical Image Quality of the System........................................................9
2.3.1 Preparing the Image Plate ........................................................................................................9
2.3.2 Erasing the Cassette...............................................................................................................11
2.3.3 Exposing the Cassette ............................................................................................................12
2.3.4 Exposing the Cassette at GenRad Modality ...........................................................................12
2.3.5 Scanning the Flatfield Image ..................................................................................................14
3 MAINTENANCE – POWER OFF............................................................................................15

3.1 Checking of Power and Network Cable ..................................................................................15
3.2 Checking of the Covers...........................................................................................................16
3.3 Checking of the Cables...........................................................................................................16
3.4 Checking of the IP Guide Plate...............................................................................................17
3.5 Checking of the four Belt Drives .............................................................................................17
3.6 Performing a mechanical Check of the Drawer Slider ............................................................18
3.7 Performing a visual Check of the Transport Rollers ...............................................................18
3.8 Performing a visual Check of all Stepper Motors....................................................................18
3.9 Cleaning the Inside .................................................................................................................19

3.10 Cleaning the Erasure Unit.......................................................................................................19
3.11 Cleaning the Prescan Antistatic Brush ...................................................................................20
3.12 Greasing the Spindle at the Cassette Fixation Unit ................................................................21
3.13 Reassembling of the removed Parts.......................................................................................21
3.14 Checking the Cassette Condition............................................................................................22
4 MAINTENANCE – POWER ON..............................................................................................22

4.1 Checking the Safety Switch ....................................................................................................23
4.2 Performing a Stall Calibration .................................................................................................23
4.3 Performing Test Cycles...........................................................................................................24
5 TECHNICAL IMAGE QUALITY CHECK OF THE SYSTEM...................................................25

5.1 Exposing the Cassette ............................................................................................................25
5.2 Cleaning of the Scan Line and the Mirror ...............................................................................25
5.3 Scanning the Flatfield Image ..................................................................................................26
5.4 Checking the Image at the Lightbox or Viewing Station .........................................................27
6 COMPLETION OF THE MAINTENANCE...............................................................................29

6.1 Resetting the Maintenance Indicator ......................................................................................29
6.2 Creating a Backup of Device specific Data.............................................................................29
6.3 Performing the Customer Conversation .................................................................................29
7 MAINTENANCE CHECKLIST ................................................................................................30

1 General Information on Preventive Maintenance
To ensure quality and functional reliability of the system all the points listed below
(minimum maintenance points) must be carried out.
IMPORTANT:
Check if it is necessary to include country specific regulations as additional
maintenance points.
1.1 Maintenance Frequency
The maintenance has to be carried out (whatever comes first):

 Every 30.000 image plate cycles or
 Every 2 years
1.2 Required Time
REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 2 hours
1.3 Required Documents
For a list of required documents see the front page of this document.
Recommendation:
Download the complete Service Manual from the Agfa HealthCare Library:
<Computed Radiography  CR Digitizers  CR 30-Xm / CR 30-X 2nd>
1.4 Required Software
Make sure that the latest digitizer software is available on the Service PC to be
prepared for a software upgrade during the preventive maintenance. The latest
software can be downloaded from the Agfa HealthCare Library:
<Computed Radiography  CR Digitizers  CR 30-Xm / CR 30-X 2nd
 Software>

1.5 Required Tools
Following required tools are part of digitizer delivery:
 TX 20
 TX 45
Limit Pattern CD ROM CR 30-X 2nd

Spare part number*: CM+9 5175 9160 1
Limit Pattern CD ROM CR 30-Xm

Spare part number*: CM+604948 00
 1.5 mm Copper Filter

 2.0 mm AL Filter
USB Flash Drive

Checked to be virus free
Spare part numbers*:
 CR 30-Xm with CIRMXXXX**: CM+6045180
 CR 30-X 2nd with CIR_XXXX** : CM+6037431
When ordering, the current revision of the spare part is delivered.
** XXXX = Version number
Following required tools are not part of digitizer delivery:
Network Cable
Lint free cloth

Flash light

1.6 Required Cleaning Material
Following cleaning material is required:
Description Order Number*

Vacuum cleaner (220/240 V, 50-60 Hz) CM+9 9999 0895 0
Or a comparable vacuum cleaner:
Dirt bags for vacuum cleaner (10 x) CM+9 9999 0896 0
CR Phosphor Plate Cleaner (2 bottles) 10+9999911970
Prosat wipes 10+9 9999 1219 0
Polynit wipes 10+9 9999 1273 0
Lint-free cloth Commercially available: Acquire locally
1.7 Required Lubrication Material
Description Order Number*

Isoflex Topas NB52 (50 ml) CM+9 9999 9247 0

2 Diagnostics
2.1 Questioning of the Customer
(1) Ask the customer for any problem that appeared since the last maintenance.
2.2 Analyzing the Info Counter
(2) Open the Internet Explorer.
If the IP address is not known: Look it up in the Configuration Tool of the
NX workstation.
(4) Select in the service menu: <Reporting  Info Counter>
(5) Check the image plate cycles since last maintenance and the last maintenance
date. Enter these values in the maintenance checklist (see section 7).
(6) Check the errors since last maintenance.
(7) Check whether service documents provides information on error solutions
e.g. by HW modifications, software upgrades etc. If applicable implement the
provided solution.

2.3 Documenting the Technical Image Quality of the System
2.3.1 Preparing the Image Plate
(1) Select the largest available cassette.

If the largest available cassette is a Full Leg / Full Spine (FLFS) Cassette, use
this cassette.
FLFS
FLFS
Figure 1
(2) Open the cassette with the

dedicated key or a pen.
517509ag.cdr
Figure 2

(3) Open the shutter.

(4) Turn the cassette around, so that 1
the black tube side is above. 2
(5) Let the black tray and image plate

slide out carefully onto the table.
1
517509ad.cdr
Figure 3
(6) Put the black tray with the image

plate onto the cassette.
(7) Check the image plate for any
contaminations or signs of damage
(e.g. dust particles, scratches).
Figure 4
(8) If the image plate is contaminated clean it with the CR screen cleaner and
a soft lint-free cloth.
If the image plate is damaged take another cassette and inform the customer.
IMPORTANT for cleaning:

Do not put the CR Phosphor Plate Cleaner directly on the image plate.
Always put the CR Phosphor Plate Cleaner on the lint-free cloth.
(9) Wait approximately 10 minutes until the surface is dry.

(10) Verify that the white phosphor side

is oriented to the black tube side
of the cassette.
(11) Put the image plate back into the
cassette so that the shutter does 1 White phosphor side
not scratch over the image plate.
2
(12) Insert the key or a pen into the Black tube side of the cassette
cassette. 517509af.cdr
(13) Close the shutter. Figure 5

(14) Remove the key.
2.3.2 Erasing the Cassette
(1) Press the Erase button.
The Digitizer switches to erase

mode. The status indicator is
continuously lighting up in blue.
5175_c01_006.ai
Figure 6
(2) Put the cassette in the digitizer:

Erasing starts.
5175_c01_005.ai
Figure 7
(3) Remove the cassette with the erased image plate from the cassette output.

2.3.3 Exposing the Cassette

2.3.3.1 Exposing the Cassette at GenRad Modality

modality.
plate. facing up
Collimated
area
5175_c36_001.cdr
Figure 8

 12 mAs
 75 kVp
 1.3 m (51,2”) distance
 Large focus
(6) Turn the cassette 180° (black side suntil facing up).

2.3.3.2 Exposing the Cassettes at a Mammography Modality
(1) Select the movdality according to

following preference list, if more
than one Mammography modality
is available on site:
1. Siemens Mammomat
2. GE DMR
3. Instrumentarium
(2) Mount the Al-filter at the modality.
(3) Insert the Mammo cassette with
the black side facing up.
Figure 9

 200 mAs
 28 kVp
 Mo source / MO filter

2.3.4 Scanning the Flatfield Image

<System Diagnosis  Flatfield>
IMPORTANT:
By selection of examination type "System Diagnosis  Flatfield", the
correct settings for image processing of the flatfield are used. Any other
examination type may give a result which cannot be compared with the
limit pattern.
This exam type is only available, when working as user “crservice”.

(6) Keep the image as reference image "before maintenance".
(7) Put the scanned cassette aside. It is used again for checking the image quality
at the end of the preventive maintenance.

3 Maintenance – Power Off
The “maintenance power off” is split up into the following steps:
# Step Section
1 Checking of power and network cable. 3.1
2 Checking of the covers. 3.2
3 Checking of the cables. 3.3
4 Checking of the IP guide plate. 3.4
5 Checking of the four belt drives. 3.5
6 Performing a mechanical check of the drawer slider. 3.6
7 Performing a visual check of the transport rollers. 3.7
8 Performing a visual check of all Motors. 3.8
9 Cleaning the inside. 3.9
10 Cleaning the erasure unit. 3.10
11 Cleaning the prescan antistatic brush. 3.11
12 Greasing the spindle at the cassette fixation unit. 3.12
13 Reassembling of the removed parts. 3.13
14 Checking the cassette condition. 3.14
NOTE:
When performing a visual check of the digitizer make sure that the components are
not damaged. If damage is visible replace the defective part.
For more information of the replacement refer to the CR 30-Xm / CR 30-X 2nd
Service Manual, chapter 3.5 Replacements / Repair Procedures.
3.1 Checking of Power and Network Cable
(1) Switch off the digitizer.

(2) Unplug the mains and network cable at the digitizer.
(3) Check the condition of both cables for:
 Damages at insulation
 Symptoms of bending or squeezing

3.2 Checking of the Covers
CAUTION:
Carefully remove the top cover.
(1) Remove all covers of the digitizer. For instructions refer to CR 30-Xm /
CR 30-X 2nd Service Manual, chapter 3.5 Replacements / Repair Procedures.
(2) Check all covers for damages (e.g. cracks).
3.3 Checking of the Cables
(1) Check the condition of all cables

inside of the digitizer.
(2) Have a close look to the cables
that are moved when the cassette
unit is opened. See Figure 10.
Figure 10
(3) Remove the screw which fixates

the Handling Control Board and
lift the board slightly up.
(4) Check the flexible cable of the
Chip Card Reader for any signs
of damage.
Figure 11

3.4 Checking of the IP Guide Plate
CAUTION:
(1) Remove the Erasure Unit and IP guide plate. Refer to CR 30-Xm / CR 30-X 2nd
Service Manual, chapter 3.5 Replacements / Repair Procedures.
(2) Check the condition of the IP

guide plate. It may not be bent
or damaged (e.g. scratches).
Figure 12
3.5 Checking of the four Belt Drives
(1) Check the condition of the 4 belt Transport Roller Motor Belt
drives in the cassette unit. Roller Clamping Motor Belt
Especially check for: Drawer Motor Belt
 Abrasion in the area of the

belts
 Worn out belts (e.g. broken Toothed Belt for
steel cores) Opener Motor M3
 Worn out gears

belts_cassette_unit.cdr
(2) Move the belts forward and Figure 13

backward manually when checking.

3.6 Performing a mechanical Check of the Drawer Slider
(1) Move the slider backward: It must

move smoothly.
(2) Put the slider back to home position
(i.e. attached to the magnets)
Figure 14
3.7 Performing a visual Check of the Transport Rollers
(1) Check that the surface of the

transport rollers in the cassette
unit is free from defects.
Figure 15
3.8 Performing a visual Check of all Stepper Motors
NOTE:
The following conditions listed below are prerequisites to perform a successful
stall calibration. For more information refer section 4.2 Performing a Stall Calibration.
(1) Check the following conditions of the stepper motors which are using a
stall detection (home/end position):
 Smooth-running of the motor drive
 Functionality of the mechanism for detection of the home/end position
 No barriers in the movement available

3.9 Cleaning the Inside
REQUIRED TOOLS:
Vacuum cleaner
(1) Clean the inside with a vacuum cleaner.

Especially check for dust in the IP transport unit, and clean this thoroughly
with the vacuum cleaner.
3.10 Cleaning the Erasure Unit
REQUIRED TOOLS:
Lint-free cloth
WARNING:
During operation the erasure unit is hot: Risk of burns. 200 c
 Avoid contact with the Erasure Unit.

 Observe the relevant sticker on the Erasure Unit.
CAUTION:
Sensitive surface. Reduced image quality possible due to clouded reflector.
 Do not touch the reflector of the erasure unit by hand.
 Do not use cleaning agents to clean the reflector.
 Only use a lint-free cloth for cleaning.
(1) Check the reflector, i.e. the lower side of the erasure unit.
(2) Remove dust or any other particles with a lint-free cloth.

3.11 Cleaning the Prescan Antistatic Brush
(1) Remove the Optic Module.

Refer to CR 30-Xm / CR 30-X 2nd
Service Manual, chapter 3.5
Replacements / Repair
Procedures.
(2) Check the Prescan Antistatic
Brush for contamination by using
a flash light.
Figure 16
(3) If dust is visible, clean the area

before the Prescan Antistatic
Brush with a small vacuum
cleaner nozzle.
Figure 17

3.12 Greasing the Spindle at the Cassette Fixation Unit
IMPORTANT:
Be careful when putting grease at the spindle. When grease gets into the digitizer
it can affect the image quality or the functionality of the digitizer.
(1) Put some grease (Isoflex Topas

NB 52) at the spindle in the area
of the spindle nut.
5175_c09_002.ai
Figure 18
3.13 Reassembling of the removed Parts
(1) Reassemble the removed parts:

 Optic Module
 IP Guide Plate
 Erasure Unit
 Covers
(2) Connect the mains and network cable.


3.14 Checking the Cassette Condition
(1) Check the following items of the cassettes:

Outside of the cassette:
 No signs of wear or defects like cracks, broken layers, buckling of the
cassette, split off parts, worn or loose protection edges
 Proper function of the shutter
Inside of the cassette:

 No signs of wear or defects like detached fleece, cracks or split off parts
 No signs of wear or defects of the tray like cracks, split off parts especially
on the rear edges
 No contamination or signs of wear or defects of the IP like any kind of
particles, traces of glue, twisted edges, buckling of the IP, split off parts
of the layer or scratches
(2) If any of the above listed symptoms are detected, separate the defective
cassettes or IP’s and instruct the operator / customer about the possible risks
of using defective cassettes or IP’s.
NOTE:
It is strongly recommended to replace affected cassettes or IP’s, if any of the above
listed symptoms are detected.
4 Maintenance – Power On
The “maintenance power on” is split up into the following steps:
# Step Section
1 Checking the safety switch 4.1
2 Performing a stall calibration for all motors 4.2
3 Performing test cycles for each used cassette format 4.3

4.1 Checking the Safety Switch
(1) Pull out the cassette unit approximately 1 cm (0.4 in). The safety switch has
to switch off the digitizer.
4.2 Performing a Stall Calibration
NOTE:
Only perform a stall calibration, if a specific error exists.
NOTE:
If the IP address is not known: Look it up in the Configuration Tool of the
NX workstation.
(4) Enter username (default: mega) and password (obtained during the classroom
training).
(5) Select in the service menu: <Maintain and calibrate  Stall
Calibration>
(6) Wait until the stall calibration is finished. This takes approximately 5 minutes.
For more information to the Stall Calibration refer to CR 30-Xm / CR 30-X 2nd
Service Manual chapter 3.6 Adjustments and Calibrations.

4.3 Performing Test Cycles
(1) Insert the cassette in the digitizer.
NOTE:
Perform the test cycle with every used cassette format.
(2) In the Service GUI select: <Analysis and Repair  Endurance Run
Cycle>
(3) Keep the default settings.
(4) Select START.
(5) Check for proper IP transport and abnormal noise.
(6) Repeat this test cycle for all other cassette formats used at the site.

5 Technical Image Quality Check of the System
The “technical image quality check” is split up into the following steps:
# Step Section
1 Expose the cassette. 5.1
2 Clean the Scan Line 5.2
3 Scan the flatfield image 5.3
4 Checking the Image at the Lightbox or Viewing Station 5.4
5.1 Exposing the Cassette
Use the same cassette as in the beginning of the preventive maintenance.

Refer to the instructions in section 2.3 of this document.
5.2 Cleaning of the Scan Line and the Mirror
(1) Check the condition of the cleaning

brush (e.g. brush is not dirty or
damaged).
(2) Clean the scan line by wiping with
the cleaning brush a few times
over the whole scan length.
The last movement must be

continuous from rear to front.
Figure 19

5.3 Scanning the Flatfield Image

<System Diagnosis  Flatfield>
IMPORTANT:
By selection of examination type "System Diagnosis  Flatfield", the
correct settings for image processing of the flatfield are used. Any other
examination type may give a result which cannot be compared with the
limit pattern.


5.4 Checking the Image at the Lightbox or Viewing Station
NOTE:
Checking the images and comparing to the limit patterns may only happen on
lightboxes and viewing stations that comply with the specified installation and
configuration conditions for diagnostic reading. For details please refer to the
respective instructions of the viewing stations / light boxes.
NOTE:
The slow scan direction is always parallel to the short side of the image plate
(except 35 x 35 cm cassettes). Due to the hanging protocol* the appearance of the
saved flatfield might differ from the physical orientation of the cassette as it has
entered the digitizer.
* The hanging protocol (DICOM expression) defines the format and presentation how the images are
displayed on the monitor.
43 cm 30 cm 30 cm 24 cm
15 cm 18 cm
24 cm
Slow scan 35 cm
direction
517509ab.cdr
Figure 20
(1) Check the image quality of the flatfield for the following artifacts:
 Stripes in fast scan or slow scan direction
 Large area inhomogeneities
 Unacceptable number of white dots.
Evaluation:
(2) If the scanned flatfield does not show one of the artifacts, no further action
is required.

(3) If the scanned flatfield shows one of the artifacts compare the flatfield with the
limit pattern. Compare the image with the limit pattern set. For detailed
instructions see enclosure document which is part of the limit pattern set.
The limit pattern set is in scope of the delivery of the digitizer or is available in
Mednet GSO Library. It is also available as spare part:
 Limit Pattern Set for verification CR 30-X 2nd:
Spare part number* CM+9 5175 9160 1
 Limit Pattern Set for verification of CR 30-Xm:
Spare part number* CM+604948 00
IMPORTANT:
If a FLFS cassette for flatfield exposure is used, the image will be slightly darker
in the upper and lower image area where the backscatter protection is removed
(approximately 1 cm each). These darker zones also have to be used for image
quality evaluation in slow scan and fast scan direction.
Flatfield with Genrad Cassette Flatfield with FLFS Cassette
Effect exaggerated
Backscatter
FLFS
Protection
10 mm
10 mm
FLFS
Figure 21

6 Completion of the Maintenance
The “completion of the maintenance” is split up into the following steps:
# Step Section
1 Resetting the Maintenance Indicator 6.1
2 Creating a Backup of Device specific Data 6.2
3 Performing the Customer Conversation 6.3
6.1 Resetting the Maintenance Indicator
(1) In the digitizer service menu select: <Maintenance Indicator>

(2) Select: <Reset of Maintenance Indicator>
NOTE:
Resetting the maintenance indicator also resets the relative counters.
6.2 Creating a Backup of Device specific Data
(1) In the service menu select: <Backup & Restore>

(2) Leave default settings.
(3) Select <Complete Backup> to perform a backup.
(4) Select <Save to PC Hard disk>.
(5) Select <Logout>.
(6) Copy the Backup ZIP file from The NX Workstation to the digitizer USB Flash
Drive and the Service PC.
6.3 Performing the Customer Conversation
(1) Fill out the Maintenance checklist and hand it out to the customer.
(2) Explain the results of the maintenance to the customer.

Maintenance
DD+DIS231.10E Checklist
7 Maintenance Checklist
Digitizer Serial Number: Image Plate Cycles and months since last
maintenance:
The maintenance has to be carried out:

 Every 30.000 Image Plate Cycles or
 Every 2 years
NOTE:
Maintenance must be carried out according to the maintenance instructions:
DD+DIS231.10E
Diagnostics OK Not OK Solved

Questioning of the customer
Analyzing the Info Counter
Documenting the Technical Image Quality of the System
Maintenance points - Power off OK Not OK Solved

Checking of Power and Network Cable
Checking of the Covers
Checking of the Cables
Checking of the IP Guide Plate
Checking of the four Belt Drives
Performing a mechanical Check of the Drawer Slider
Performing a visual Check of the Transport Rollers
Performing a visual Check of the Stepper Motors
Cleaning the Inside
Cleaning the Erasure Unit
Cleaning the Prescan Antistatic Brush
Greasing the Spindle at the Cassette Fixation Unit

Maintenance
DD+DIS231.10E Checklist
Maintenance points - Power off OK Not OK Solved

Reassembling of the removed Parts
Checking the Cassette Condition
Maintenance points - Power on OK NOT OK Solved

Checking the Safety Switch
Performing a Stall Calibration
Performing Test Cycles
Technical Image Quality Check of the System OK NOT OK Solved

Exposing the Cassette
Cleaning of the Scan Line and the Mirror
Scanning the Flatfield Image
Checking the Image at the Lightbox or Viewing Station
Completion OK NOT OK Solved

Resetting the Maintenance Indicator
Creating a Backup of Device specific Data
Performing the Customer Conversation
Remarks:
............................................................. .........................................................
Date / Signature Service Technician Date / Signature Customer

Imaging Services Service Bulletins
CR 30-Xm
Type 5179 / 100
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
► Please note
Service Bulletins are not part of the Service Manual for Download.
Please download the Service Bulletins from the Agfa HealthCare Library:
Agfa HealthCare Library Æ Computed Radiography Æ CR Digitizers Æ
CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm Æ Service Bulletin *
* For external partners: Please ask your local Agfa representative for access.

DD+DIS230.10E Service Bulletins

Edition 1, Revision 1 CR 30-X 2nd Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225 Chapter 10 / 2
Imaging Services Installation Planning
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
CR 30-Xm
Type 5179 / 100
This document contains all planning data including the required measures to be carried
out on site prior to the machine delivery.
This chapter is divided into:
• Construction planning data
• Technical connection and performance data
• Safety instructions, listing of certificates

1.1 02-2012 • Updated AE-Title in section 4.1.
• Updated dimensions of the digitizer in section 7.
• Added information about CR 30-Xm.
Document Title
Not applicable

eq_11_install-planning_e_template_v08
1 2 3
DD+DIS229.10E Installation Planning
► Manufacturer
Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany
or its affiliates.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
IMPORTANT:
such services.
NOTE:

1 2 3
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................................5

1.1 System Overview ......................................................................................................................5
1.2 Workflow of a CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm System .....................................................................6
2 SCOPE OF DELIVERY AND ACCESSORIES.........................................................................7

2.1 Scope of Delivery......................................................................................................................7
2.2 Accessories...............................................................................................................................8
3 ROOM PREPARATION............................................................................................................9
3.1 Minimum required free Space for Operation and Maintenance................................................9
4 SYSTEM INTEGRATION .......................................................................................................10

4.1 Integration of the CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm into the Hospital Network ..................................10
5 CLIMATIC AND AMBIENT CONDITIONS..............................................................................12

5.1 Conditions during Transport and Storage...............................................................................12
5.2 Conditions during Operation ...................................................................................................13
6 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS ..............................................................................................14

6.1 Electrical Connections at the Digitizer ....................................................................................17
6.2 Electrical Connections at the optional UPS ............................................................................17
7 DIGITIZER DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT ..............................................................................18

7.1 Digitizer with closed Covers....................................................................................................18
7.2 Digitizer with Front Cover opened...........................................................................................18
7.3 Dimensions of the Digitizer including Packaging ....................................................................19
7.4 Dimensions of the Pallet .........................................................................................................19
7.5 Weight of the Digitizer.............................................................................................................19
7.6 Dimensions of the All-in-one Cart (Optional) ..........................................................................20
8 SPECIFICATIONS..................................................................................................................21
8.1 Type Overview ........................................................................................................................21
8.2 Functional Data .......................................................................................................................22
8.3 Resolution ...............................................................................................................................22
8.4 Electrical Data of Digitizer.......................................................................................................23

1 2 3
8.5 Functional Data of the optional UPS.......................................................................................23
8.6 Climatic Data...........................................................................................................................23
8.7 Acoustic Noise Level...............................................................................................................23
8.8 Boot-up Time and Warm-up Time...........................................................................................24
8.9 Interface Data..........................................................................................................................24
8.10 Service Data............................................................................................................................24
8.11 Functional Data Image Plates.................................................................................................24
9 SAFETY STANDARDS...........................................................................................................25
10 INSTALLATION PLANNING CHECKLIST..............................................................................27
10.1 Installation Planning Checklist ................................................................................................27
10.2 Installation Readiness Checklist .............................................................................................29

1 2 3
1 Product Description
This document describes the installation planning of the CR 30-X 2nd digitizer.
The CR 30-X 2nd, Type 5175 comprises the following subtypes:

The CR 30-X 2nd, Type 5179 comprises the following subtypes:

• Type 5179, subtype 100 = CR 30-Xm
The differences between the different types are described in section 8.1 and 8.2.
For the installation of the complete system it is additionally required to perform

all steps described in the NX Workstation Installation Planning document.
Refer to the Agfa HealthCare Library:
<Computed Radiography Æ CR Workstation Software>
1.1 System Overview
The CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm digitizer is part of the CR system, consisting of:
• Digitizer
• Cassettes with Image Plate (IP)
• NX Workstation
NX Workstation NX Workstation
Digitizer Tower Version Digitizer Laptop Version *
Cassette Cassette
Figure 1
* Mammography application not available on the laptop version of the NX Workstation.
For compatibility of the Laptop Version check the CR/DR Interoperability Matrix,
Document ID 31333326 (Intranet Link / Extranet Link)

1 2 3
1.2 Workflow of a CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm System
The following figure indicates a typical workflow of a CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm system:
1
Take exposure.
5
Take cassette
for next exposure.
2
Insert exposed cassette
in digitizer:
The image plate is prepared
for scanning
3
Go to NX Workstation
and select patient:
The digitizer starts scanning
4
Wait till image plate cycle
is finished (approximately 1 minute). 517502ah.cdr
Figure 2
Step 1: Take the exposure.

Step 2: Insert the exposed cassette into the digitizer.
Step 3: Go to the NX workstation. Select the patient from the worklist and
select the ID* button. The IP** cycle starts.
Step 4: Wait till the IP** cycle is finished.
For the CR 30-X 2nd subtypes 200 and 220 it takes approximately
1 minute.
For the CR 30-X 2nd subtypes 205 and 225 it takes approximately
1.5 minutes.
For the CR 30-Xm subtype 100 it takes approximately 2 minutes.
The digitizer sends the image data during scanning (i.e. during the
IP cycle) to the NX workstation.
Step 5: Take out the cassette for the next examination.
* ID = Identify
** IP = Image Plate

1 2 3
2 Scope of Delivery and Accessories

2.1 Scope of Delivery
Quantity Description
1 Digitizer
1 Packing list for Accessory
1 CE declaration of conformity
1 Enclosure with information concerning RoHS*
1 Installation Procedure, DD+DIS148.11E
(Chapters 1 and 11 of the Technical Documentation)
1 Power cable, Europe 3.00 m
1 Power cable, US 3.00 m
1 Network cable 5 m / 16 feet long
1 1.5 mm CU filter
1 2.0 mm Al filter
1 USB stick with Software for the digitizer
1 Torx Key TX20
1 Torx Key TX45
1 CD with limit patterns for flatfield evaluation
1 CD with User Manuals in all specified languages**
* RoHS = Restriction of the use of certain Hazardous Substances
** Language: Chinese-simplified, Chinese-traditional, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English, Finnish, French,
German, Greek, Italian, Korean, Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese, Russian, Spanish, Swedish, Thai,
Vietnamese, Estonian, Hungarian, Latvian, Lithuanian, Slovak, Slovenian, Turkish
IMPORTANT:
The digitizer is ordered and delivered with a dedicated NX workstation.
The CR 30-X 2nd requires at least NX2.0.8500 or higher, the CR 30-Xm requires
NX2.0.8600 or higher.
It is not possible to connect the digitizer to another type of Agfa CR workstation
(e.g. QS 3.5).
IMPORTANT:
The digitizer is delivered with two power cables for US/Europe. If digitizer is installed
outside the US or Europe, organize a power cable for your country locally.
For detailed specifications refer to section 6, Electrical Connections.
NOTE:
The digitizer is delivered with all parts, which are required to set up the device
into operation.
Number and format of cassettes / image plates are depending on the individual order.

1 2 3
2.2 Accessories
The following accessories are available for the CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm digitizer:
Warning:
standby generator.
Item ABC Code Comment

All-in-one cart E2M3H For dimensions refer to section 7.6.
UPS Powerware 5115, EGPSE Can be used for digitizer and NX.
120 V Version For technical specifications refer to
section 8.
UPS Powerware 5115, EGPTG
220 V Version See safety note below.
Mobile Kit EWRQ5 To be used in earthquake areas and in
mobile usage. May not be used in military
vessels.
Rear Mounting Plate
Retainers for digitizer feet
Base Plate
517511bb.cdr
Remote Service Not applicable See NOTE below.

Table EWRP3 For dimensions refer to section 3.1
NOTE to Accessory "Remote Service":

In general it is possible to diagnose and repair the digitizer to a certain extent remotely.
To enable remote service of the digitizer remote access has first to be organized.
Remote Access is established via the Agfa own Secure Remote Service System
(SRSS).
For more information to the SRSS see Agfa HealthCare Library*:
<Technical Services Æ Service Delivery Æ SRSS>
* Only applicable for Agfa Employees.
For external partners: Contact your local Agfa partner.

1 2 3
3 Room Preparation
3.1 Minimum required free Space for Operation and Maintenance
CAUTION:
Reduced airflow may lead to pollution in the digitizer.
Keep a minimum of 5 cm (2 inches) between rear side of the digitizer and the wall.
At least 50 cm [19.7 in] space has to be provided on the right hand side to allow
cleaning of the scan line with the cleaning brush. This can be performed by the
customer.
NOTE:
The floor of the installation place must be stable and may not transmit mechanical
vibrations as e.g. footfall sound.
If installed on the optional All-in-one Cart the digitizer can also be installed in a corner;
see section 7.6, Dimensions of the All-in-one Cart.
> 50 [19.7]
> 5 [2.0] *
60 [23.6] 60 [23.6]
80 [31.5] 80 [31.5]
60 [23.6] 60 [23.6]
537511ac.ai
Figure 3: Scale 1:20; Dimensions are in cm [inch]
IMPORTANT:
*The clearance in the rear for electrical connectors and to provide sufficient air flow
has to be at least 5 cm [2.0 in] in any case.

1 2 3
4 System Integration
(1) Download following documents before installation.

• CR/DR Interoperability Matrix, Document ID* 31333326,
(2) By means of these documents check, whether the new ordered system
components and the already available equipment on site (if available) can be
used together in the system.
4.1 Integration of the CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm into the Hospital Network
WARNING:
When different combinations of equipment are used in various medical
environments a potential difference (V) can exist between the protective earths
in different localities. If the protective earthing fails this potential difference can
cause a HAZARD for the OPERATOR or for the PATIENT.
• To comply with ISO 60601-1 (annex I) all computers and peripherals must be
• Always connect the associated monitor to the same Uninterruptible Power
Source (UPS) as the PC.
WARNING:
The digitizer is heavy (72.0 kg; 158.73 lb). Risk of injuries when lifting the
digitizer.

1 2 3
WARNING:
IMPORTANT:
• Unpacking of the digitizer and putting on the table should be done by the
forwarder. For more information refer to the Unpacking instructions.
• Recommended table height: 75 cm
• Due to the workflow* of the system it is recommended to install digitizer and
NX workstation close together.
* The operator has to go from digitizer to the NX workstation and back to the digitizer for each
scan cycle.
• If the laptop version of the NX workstation is used:

Do not place the laptop on top of the CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm, because the
accumulated heat developed by the digitizer and the laptop may affect the
The digitizer has to be connected to the NX workstation via network cable,

either directly or via hospital network
The NX workstation and the CR30-X 2nd or CR 30-Xm Digitizer always belong
together, meaning that each CR Digitizer has to be connected to one dedicated NX
workstation.
The following table gives information about the default parameter of Digitizer ex factory.
Parameter: Default value: Value:
IP Address: 192.192.192.192 ..............................................

Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 ..............................................
Gateway IP Address: 192.192.192.1 ..............................................
AE Title: DIG_DEFAULT ..............................................
Hostname: 192.192.192.192 ..............................................

1 2 3
5 Climatic and ambient Conditions

5.1 Conditions during Transport and Storage
Environmental conditions According IEC721-3-1: 1K2 (CR 30-X) / 1K4 (CR

during storage 30-Xm) and 1M2
Temperature Minimum: -25 °C (-13 °F)
Maximum: +55 °C (131 °F)
Environmental conditions According IEC721-3-2: 2K2 and 2M2

during transport
Temperature Minimum: -25 °C (-13 °F)
Maximum: +60 °C (140 °F)
Vibration 5-200 Hz (vertical, longitudinal, transversal axis)
Environmental conditions for According IEC 721-3-5: 5K2 and 5M2

mobile installation during
transport
Vibration 5-150 Hz (all axis), 1m/s², sinusoidal vibration
For transport in mobile According IEC TR 60721-4-5 (1997): class 5M2.

installations
(device unpacked, with wall
fixture kit, not in function)

1 2 3
5.2 Conditions during Operation
IMPORTANT:
Make sure that the digitizer is not exposed to any vibrations or shocks during
operation.
Ambient temperature Recommended: 20 °C (68 °F) to 25 °C (77 °F)

Allowed: 15 °C (59 °F) to 30 °C (86 °F)
Temperature change Maximum: 0,5 °C/min
Relative humidity Recommended: 30 % to 60 %
Allowed: 15 % to 75 % (non-condensing)
Magnetic field Maximum 3.8 µT in conformance with
EN6100-4-8: Level 2
Radiation influences If the digitizer is installed in the x-ray room,
it has to be protected against scatter radiation.
Environmental conditions for According IEC721-3-3: 3K2 and 3M1

mobile installation during
operation
Temperature Minimum: +15 °C (59 °F)
Maximum: +30 °C (86 °F)
Relative humidity Minimum: 15 %
Maximum: 75 %
Vibration 40-200 Hz; 1m/s²; sinusoidal vibration
WARNING:
The digitizer and the cassette storage shall be protected against X-ray radiation this
way, that the annual dose equivalent at the installation place will not exceed 1 mSv.
Ambient Light The digitizer may not be operated in direct

(Environmental light condition) sun light. No influence on image quality is
guaranteed if operated in ambient light of
maximum 2500 Lux.
High Frequency Emission and For detailed information refer to the digitizer
Immunity user manual.

1 2 3
6 Electrical Connections
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
• Position the Agfa products so that it is possible to disconnect the mains power
connection if required.
• Local and International wiring regulations must be observed. Check all supplies
and voltages, currents, trips and fuses with the Hospital facilities department or
their engineers.
Installation Electrical installations have to be done in accordance with

guidelines national regulations or statutory requirements, e.g.:
VDE: Electrical installations in the installation room
(Germany) must be in compliance with the regulations IEC
364, VDE 0100, and VDE 0107.
UL: (US) Electrical installations in the installation room
must be in compliance with the regulations:
“National Electrical Code" (NEC) (NFPA70).
Mains connection VDE: Double earthed pin outlet in compliance with
in the installation (Germany) DIN 49441 and with CEE 7 standard cover V II.
room UL: (US) Earthed contact outlet for the NEMA 5-15 P plug
Mains cable Euro- CEE7/7 - H05VV -
(part of delivery) Version: F3G1 - 3 x 1 mm² with
IEC C13 plug (female);
cable length 3 m CEE7/7
IEC C13
5175_C11_001.cdr
US/CAN- NEMA 5-15P - SJT,

Version: 3 x AWG 18 with
IEC C13 plug (female);
Cable length 3 m, IEC C13
Hospital grade (HG)
NEMA 5-15P 5175_C11_002.cdr

1 2 3
NOTE:
The digitizer is delivered with two power cables for US/Europe. If a different cable is
needed, organize it locally but keep attention to country specific requirements.
Example:
Power cable to be organized locally for US/CAN, if a connection to a 240 V-outlet
instead of the standard 120 V-outlet is needed:
NEMA 6-15P - SJT,3 x AWG 18 with IEC C13 connector (female); Hospital grade (HG)
Network cable UTP; AWG24; Length: 5 m

(part of delivery)
Mains switch Upon digitizer installation, it must be ensured that either the
mains connector or an all-pole circuit breaker for the
installation on site is located close to the machine and easily
accessible.
Cables for the optional UPS:
NOTE:
The following cables listed in the tables on next page are only used for the
recommended UPS Powerware 5115. If another UPS Powerware model is used the
cables may change.
For more Information refer to provided UPS Manual.

1 2 3
UPS Powerware 5115 1 Serial cable; part of UPS delivery

230 V Version* 2 Extension cable (1.8 m); part of UPS delivery
3 Extension cable (1.8 m); part of UPS delivery
4 Mains cable; part of digitizer delivery
*Check which UPS Powerware is needed for the CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm installation. If another UPS
Powerware version needs to be used, the cables listed in the table may change.
230 V (220 - 240 V) Version

Type 5115 - 750i
2 1
3
4
to wall outlet
Figure 4
UPS Powerware 5115 5 Mains cable; part of digitizer delivery

120 V Version*
6 Mains cable; part of NX delivery
7 Serial cable; part of UPS delivery
8 Fixed SJT, 3 x AGW 18 with NEMA 5-15 P
plug: 1.8 m
*Check which UPS Powerware is needed for the CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm installation. If another UPS
Powerware version needs to be used, the cables listed in the table may change.
120 V (110 - 120 V) Version

Type 5115 - 750
7
5
6
8
to wall outlet
Figure 5

1 2 3
6.1 Electrical Connections at the Digitizer
The following figure shows the electrical connections at the digitizer:
Power Supply Input

100 - 240 V / 50 - 60 Hz AC
Mains Switch Intergrounding

Connector
Network Connector
517511ad.cdr
Figure 6
6.2 Electrical Connections at the optional UPS
The following Figure shows an example of the electrical connections

at the optional UPS:
230 V (220 - 240 V) Version 120 V (110 - 120 V) Version

Type 5115 - 750i Type 5115 - 750
Serial Port Serial Port

(to NX Workstation) (to NX Workstation)
Four 10 A, IEC-320 Four 5 - 15

Receptacles Receptacles
10 A, IEC-320 Power cord ( 6ft / 1.8 m)

Input Connector with 5 - 15 Plug
517511aj.cdr
Figure 7

1 2 3
7 Digitizer Dimensions and Weight

7.1 Digitizer with closed Covers
Dimensions in cm [inch]
52.5 [20.7]
78.6 [30.9] 69.3 [27.2]
Figure 8
Length 78.6 cm / 30.9 inch

Width 69.3 cm / 27.2 inch
Height 52.5 cm / 20.7 inch
7.2 Digitizer with Front Cover opened
Dimensions in cm [inch]
52.5 [20.7]
100.2 [39.5] 69.3 [27.2]
Figure 9
Length 100.2 cm / 39.5 inch

Width 69.3 cm / 27.2 inch
Height 52.5 cm / 20.7 inch

1 2 3
7.3 Dimensions of the Digitizer including Packaging
Length 90 cm / 35.4 inch

Width 80 cm / 31.5 inch
Height 69 cm / 27.2 inch
7.4 Dimensions of the Pallet
Length 90 cm / 35.4 inch

Width 80 cm / 31.5 inch
Height inclusive palette 15 cm / 6 inch
7.5 Weight of the Digitizer
Digitizer alone 72.0 kg / 158.73 lb

Digitizer with packing inclusive 106.5 kg / 234.8 lb
palette

1 2 3
7.6 Dimensions of the All-in-one Cart (Optional)
For the CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm digitizer is an All-in-one Cart available.
NOTE:
The already existing All-in-one Cart of the CR 30-X digitizer (Type 5175 / 100 / 105 /
110 / 120 / 125) with SN < 3.000 requires the installation of an "Adaptor base plate" to
make them compatible for the CR 30-X 2nd (Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225) or
CR 30-Xm (Type 5179 / 100) digitizer.
The adaptor base plate can be ordered with spare part number*: CM+6027470
IMPORTANT:
If the customer uses a different table, observe the stability of the table: It must be able
to carry the weight of 72.0 kg (158.73 lb) and may not be subject to excessive shock
and vibrations from other sources.
WARNING:
The All-in-one cart consists of:

• Table for digitizer
• Storage for cassettes
• Storage of NX workstation, inclusive:
o Monitor
o Keyboard
o Mouse
• Storage of optional UPS
Figure 10

1 2 3
Dimensions of the All-in-one Cart:
155 cm [61 1"]
.
FRONT LEFT
75,7 cm [29 8"]
70,0 cm [27.6"]
77,0 cm [30 3"]
TOP
5175_c11_002.ai
Figure 11: Dimensions in cm [inch]
8 Specifications
8.1 Type Overview
Type ABC Code Serial Number

5175 / 200 5QTR4 ≥ 50.001
5175 / 205 5RVQK ≥ 80.001
5175 / 220 5RVRM ≥ 70.001
5175 / 225 5RVSO ≥ 85.001
5179 / 100 5SDMH ≥ 1.001

1 2 3
8.2 Functional Data
Cassette Type Format Resolution Width x Length Width x Length

(cm) (pixel/mm) (pixels) (mm)
CR MD4.0T 15 x 30 10 1440 x 2928 144.0 x 292.8
General plate
18 x 24 10 1728 x 2328 172.8 x 232.8
and cassette
(GenRad PIP) 24 x 30 10 2328 x 2928 232.8 x 292.8
35 x 35 10 3480 x 3480 348.0 x 348.0
35 x 43 10 3480 x 4248 348.0 x 424.8
CR MD4.0T 35 x 43 10 3480 x 4406 348.0 x 440.6
FLFS cassette
(GenRad PIP)
CR MM3.0T 24 x 30 20 4710 x 5844 471.0 x 584.4
Mammo plate
18 x 24 20 3510 x 4644 351.0 x 464.4
and cassette
Throughput Cassette Format Minimum Number of

Cassettes per hour
Type 5175 / 200 35 x 43 60
Type 5175 / 205 35 x 43 35
Type 5175 / 220 35 x 43 60
Type 5175 / 225 35 x 43 35
Type 5179 / 100 24 x 30 32
8.3 Resolution
Bits per pixel / number of grey steps 16 / 65535

Scan Resolution 50 / 100 μm depending on
used image plate
(Mammo / Genrad)
Data acquisition 20 Bits/Pixel
Output to processor 16 Bits/Pixel square root
compressed

1 2 3
8.4 Electrical Data of Digitizer
Rated voltage 100 - 240 V AC (autosensing)

Frequency 50/60 Hz
Current 1.0 A – 2.0 A
8.5 Functional Data of the optional UPS
Rated voltage UPS Powerware 120 V = Default

5115-750 (ABC Code: EGPSE)* 110 V = User adjustable via rear panel
DIP switches
Rated voltage UPS Powerware 230 V = Default
5115-750i (ABC Code: EGPTG)* 220 or 240 V = User adjustable via rear
panel DIP switch
Frequency 50/60 Hz (autosensing)
Battery runtime > 5 min
Output Power 750 W
Dimensions (HxWxD) 192 x 150 x 270 mm /
7.6 x 5.9 x 10.6 inch
Weight 7.8 kg / 17.2 lb
More info Refer to www.powerware.com
8.6 Climatic Data
CR 30-X 2nd Standby: 60 W = 204 BTU/h

Heat emission Maximum: 190 W = 648 BTU/h
Average of one cycle: 85 W = 290 BTU/h
CR 30-Xm Standby: 60 W = 204 BTU/h

Heat emission Maximum: 220 W = 751 BTU/h
Average of one cycle: 103 W = 351 BTU/h
8.7 Acoustic Noise Level
Acoustic Noise Level Standby: 55 dB(A) maximum

according ISO 7779 During scanning: 65 dB(A) maximum

1 2 3
8.8 Boot-up Time and Warm-up Time
Cold start Fully operational after max. 30 min.

Warm start Fully operational after self-test, on condition
that the digitizer:
• has not been switched off for more than 3
minutes.
• has been operational for at least 30
minutes.
8.9 Interface Data
Interface to NX workstation Ethernet, RJ45 connector (female),

10/100 Mbit/s autosensing *,
shielding CAT5
* Gigabit Ethernet is not supported.
8.10 Service Data
Info counter Yes

Service User Interface via Browser access Yes
Remote / preventive service capable Yes
8.11 Functional Data Image Plates
Image plate type CR MD4.0T

Image retention Within 1 hour Recommended readout time
After 2 hours 80 % of the stored energy is still present with
no visible loss of information upon readout.
After 24 hours Image retention still exceeds 50 %.
Slightly reduced images quality
Image plate type CR MM3.0T

Image retention Within 1 hour Recommended readout time
After 2 hours 80 % of the stored energy is still present with
no visible loss of information upon readout.
After 24 hours Image retention still exceeds 50 %.
Slightly reduced images quality

1 2 3
9 Safety Standards
The digitizer complies with:
North American Standards European Norm and International

Federal Communications Commission Standards
Canadian Standards Association European Norm
Underwriters Laboratories International Electrotechnical Commission
Code of Federal Regulations
EMC* • ISO 14971:2009, Medical • EN 540: 1993

devices - Application of risk
management to medical devices. • EN 980: 2008
• EN 1041: 2008
• ISO 18906: 2000
• EN ISO 13485: 2003 / AC: 2009
Safety • UL 60601-1:2003 • IEC 60601-1 / EN 60601-1
• CAN / CSA 22.2 No. 601.1 • IEC 60601-1-1:2000 /
EN 60601-1-1:2001
• IEC 62304:2006 /
EN 62304:2006
• IEC 60601-1-6:2006 /
EN 60601-1-1:2007
• IEC 60601-1-2: 2007 /
EN 60601-1-2:2007
• ISO 14971:2009, Medical devices -
Application of risk management to
medical devices
Additional • IEC 62079 Ed. 1: Preparation of
instructions - Structuring, content
and presentation
* EMC = Electromagnetic Compatibility

1 2 3
The leakage current limits for which this device is tested, excludes installation in the
patient vicinity. Therefore the equipment must be placed outside the patient vicinity
according to the local valid regulation (UL 60601-1 or EN 60601-1).
The patient vicinity is defined as follows:
• UL 60601-1:
o 1.83 m (6 feet) beyond the perimeter of the bed (examination table, dental chair,
treatment booth, and the like)
o Vertical 2.29 m (7.5 feet) above the floor
• EN 60601-1:
o 1.5 m (4.9 feet) beyond the perimeter of the bed (examination table, dental
chair, treatment booth, and the like)
o Vertical 2.5 m (8.2 feet) above the floor
R
Patient vicinity
h
Patient vicinity
patient_vicinity.cdr
R = 1.5 m / 4.9 feet (EN 60601-1) or 1.83 m / 6 feet (UL 60601-1)

h = 2.5 m / 8.2 feet (EN 60601-1) or 2.29 m / 7.5 feet (UL 60601-1)
Figure 12
• Other equipment that is in contact with the patient is not connected directly
to the Agfa system without additional protective measures.

1 2 3
10 Installation Planning Checklist

10.1 Installation Planning Checklist
# Step Goal Section OK Task

code*
1. Ask the Agfa sales To schedule an installation date
representative for a with the customer.
contact person in - PRI**
To get the list of ordered
the hospital.
equipment that needs to be
installed.
2. Make yourself To see in which environment the
familiar with the digitizer will be installed. 0 PRI
System Overview.
3. Make yourself Basic information, to see
familiar with the whether additional, site specific
2.1 PRI
scope of delivery. material for installation might be
required.
4. Make yourself Hospital employees are involved
familiar with the in installation and operation of
8 PRI
digitizer the digitizer and the list about
specifications. technical specifications.
5. Check the digitizer Customer / Operator knows the
safety standards safety standards and regulations 9 PRI
and regulations. of the digitizer.
6. Check the machine To check the transport path and
dimensions. the desired installation place for 7 PRI
sufficient space.
7. Ensure the required Installation location complies
free space around with the requirements for
3.1 PRI
the digitizer. minimum floor space for
operation and service.

1 2 3
# Step Goal Section OK Task

code*
8. Make an Physical network access is
appointment with granted.
the network
IP addresses at hand during
administrator and
installation
check the network
- PRI
access. Initiate to Hospital network sockets
establish necessary operational at installation point in
amount of IP time
addresses at
installation time.
9. Make an Operators are available for
appointment with training at date.
- PRI
the radiologist for
operator training.
10. If applicable make Hospital technician available and
an appointment with prepared to perform mounting of
the hospital earthquake kit during installation. - PRI
technician to mount
the earthquake kit.
11. Make an Knowing where the device will
appointment with arrive.
the hospital
Knowing the transport path; - PRI
technician to define
clarifying eventual needs for
delivery and
transportation means.
transport path.
12. Compare the Environmental conditions at the
required ambient installation location complies
and climatic with the operation conditions of
8.6 PRI
conditions with the the digitizer.
condition at the
installation place.
13. Make an To be able to initiate all required
appointment with prerequisites in advance to allow
the house electrician proper electrical connections.
or the authorized
6 PRI
electrician and
check the required
electrical
connection.
14. Check the To be sure that all required pre-
installation installation conditions are
10.2 PRI
readiness during fulfilled.
follow up visit.

1 2 3
10.2 Installation Readiness Checklist
In order to guarantee an effective and smooth installation process within the targeted
time frame, the following tasks of the checklist below must be carried out prior to the
installation of the device.
Check and discuss all the required measures for the installation by means of this
checklist. Remarks on the individual items can be noted on the back of the list.
For Agfa employees only:

After completion hand out this checklist to your local Agfa representative.
Name of Field
Service Engineer: Checking date:
Client name:
Client address:
Contact person,
name and title:
Client phone
number: Extension:
Order / OGT*
Type of systems: number:
* OGT = Order Generation Tool, only applicable for Agfa employees

1 2 3
Task OK Task code*

OGT = Order Generation Tool, only applicable for
Agfa employees
Installation date scheduled with the customer. PRI**

Tasks of Installation Planning Checklist performed
successfully.
PRI**
Details see section 10.1:
Installation Planning Checklist
Installation Site ready for Installation -
Remarks:
Signature of Field Service Engineer: _______________________________________

CR 30-Xm
Type 5179 / 100
DD+DIS230.10E
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
1. Edition
CR 30-Xm
Type 5179 / 100
DD+DIS230.10E
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
1. Edition
CR 30-Xm
Type 5179 / 100
DD+DIS230.10E
CR 30-X 2nd
Type 5175 / 200 / 205 / 220 / 225
1. Edition

CR-30 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CR-30 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HEALTHCARE ReadMeFirst

Imaging Services Service Manual for Download

► Purpose of this Document

Edition. Release Changes

1 Integrating the Order List for Documentation

2 Printing single Pages, Chapters or the complete Manual

Preferably print circuit diagrams on a DIN A3 or ANSI B (Ledger) printer, if

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 2 Page 2 of 5

2.1 Printing single Pages or Chapters

To print single chapters or pages of a chapter proceed as follows:

Figure 1: PDF page number in the Adobe reader toolbar

(3) Go the end of the section or desired range of pages.

Figure 2: Print dialogue for printing single pages or chapters

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 2 Page 3 of 5

2.2 Printing the complete Service Manual

To print the complete service manual proceed as follows:

Figure 3: Print dialogue for printing the complete manual

Figure 4: Adobe Reader comments toolbar

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 2 Page 4 of 5

3.1 Exporting your Comments

Figure 5: Drop down menu “Comment & Markup”

3.2 Importing Comments

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 2 Page 5 of 5

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

► Purpose of this Document

This document provides information on the structure and contents of the

Edition. Release Changes

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

0 Generic Safety Directions

1 Controls, Connections and Set Up Procedures

3 Repair and Service

3.1 Machine specific Safety and Repair Information

3.2 Tools and auxiliary Means

4 Reference and Circuit Diagrams

5 Spare Parts List

8 Manufacturing Standard Modifications

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Safety relevant Notes

Not-safety relevant Notes

IMPORTANT: Highlights very important actions which have to be carried out

NOTE: • Indicates advice to facilitate the following step or action

Highlighting of Buttons, Functions and Names within a Task

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

1 About this Manual

The CR 30-X 2nd / CR 30-Xm digitizer is part of the CR system, comprising:

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

This Service Manual does not cover:

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Generic Safety Directions

► Purpose of this Document

Edition. Release Changes

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

2 USED ICONS ........................................................................................................ 6

7 INTENDED USER ............................................................................................... 11

8 QUALIFICATIONS FOR OPERATION AND SERVICE TASKS.......................... 11

9 ENVIRONMENTAL AND OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS............. 12

10 CONNECTIONS TO OTHER EQUIPMENT ........................................................ 13

11 ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS ................................................................ 14

13 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR OPERATION......................................................... 17